May 15, 2024  
Official Course Syllabi 2018-2019 
    
Official Course Syllabi 2018-2019 [ARCHIVED CATALOG]

Course Syllabi


 

Product Development

  
  • PRDE 2916 - Introduction to Simulation & Analysis


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course introduces students to CAD Simulation and Analysis operations that can be used to model and/or analyze the effectiveness of potential solutions to design problems. The course includes 3D sketch applications, plane creation, application of kinematics and dynamics, and an introduction to Finite Element Analysis with related 3D CAD simulation software.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: ATMT-1950

    Prerequisite: PRDE-1620


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to develop and evaluate alternative 3D CAD design solutions.

    Objectives: The student will use SolidWorks Simulation 3D CAD tools and:

    1. Apply logic and order to build model and assembly structure(s).
    2. Create 3D solid models.
    3. Apply feature constraints in model creation.
    4. Develop 3D assemblies.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate and simulate design solutions based on the ability to handle kinematic and dynamic load factors.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks Dynamics Lab 3D CAD applications the student will apply kinematic and dynamic properties to 3D models and assemblies and:

    1. Explain limitations of simulation/analysis techniques.
    2. Use analytical and simulation tools to evaluate analyze 3D CAD model performance/capability.
    3. Determine collision/clearance relationships using simulation tools.
    4. Use a CAD tool to apply kinematics to CAD models/assemblies.
    5. Define boundary conditions.
    6. Determine linear, rotary and/or rotational movements among multiple components.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to Use Solid Works Simulation 3D CAD to perform basic FEA analysis applying restraints and loads, define materials and interpreting results writing basic reports.

    Objectives: Using basic SolidWorks FEA CAD tools, the learner will:

    1. Explain limitations of FEA techniques.
    2. Perform basic Finite Element Analysis of 3D CAD part/assembly.
    3. Define how forces impact product designs.
    4. Calculate static/dynamic forces that impact performance of design solutions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Advanced 3D sketch creation Particle Kinematics-Particle Dynamics Force & Acceleration
    2. Particle Dynamics Work & Energy-Particle Dynamics Impulse & Momentum
    3. Planar Rigid Body Kinematics-Planar Rigid Body Dynamics Force & Acceleration Advanced surfacing applications
    4. Planar Rigid Body Dynamics, work & Energy-Planar Rigid Body Dynamics Impulse & Momentum
    5. 3D Rigid Body Kinematics-3D Rigid Body Dynamics Application of basic simulation tools to analyze part performance
    6. Vibrations
    7. Introduction to Finite Element Analysis
    8. Static Analysis of a plate
    9. Static Analysis of an L-bracket
    10. Static and Frequency analysis pipe support
    11. Static Analysis of a Link
    12. Frequency analysis of a tuning fork and a plastic part

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Adlam, Arthur
    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2918 - Advanced Materials


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course will address the use and functionality of the composite materials, aluminum and joining.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PRDE-1300


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Student will identify the benefits and limitations of steel versus aluminum alloys for light weighting applications.

    1. Apply Material Considerations
      1. Ashby material selection guidelines
      2. Steel versus aluminum-benefits and limitations
      3. Design with aluminum-current trends and real life examples
      4. Fatigue, S-N curves

    Outcome 2: Student will apply an understanding of failure of aluminum due to galvanic corrosion and protection of aluminum joints against such defects

    1. Construct Design for Functional Performance
      1. Galvanic corrosion
      2. Fastener protection
      3. Non-conductive barrier material
      4. Mixed material designs

    Outcome 3: Student will develop an understanding of and ability to redesign a steel part using aluminum alloys in a view to design products using aluminum or other best choice of lightweight materials.

    1. Apply Characteristics of Extruded Products
      1. Basic types of extruded shapes, open, semi-closed and closed
      2. Variation of material thickness in cross sections
      3. Extrusion of inner and outer webs and fins
      4. Role of hollow profiles for joining extrusions
      5. High volume aluminum alloys-6060 and 6030
      6. Bumper beams in special 7xxx-series alloys
      7. Design guidelines

    Outcome 4: Student will identify the main applications, pros, cons of composite materials

    1. Identify fibers-carbon/glass/polymeric/ceramic
    2. Identify matrices-thermoset/thermoplastics

    Outcome 5: Student will understand composite design guidelines for proper CAD practices. Apply minimum inside radius. Apply undercuts.

    1. Apply molded-in holes
    2. Apply recommended draft
    3. Apply practical thickness
    4. Apply ribs
    5. Apply molded-in labels
    6. Apply surface finishes
    7. Apply metal inserts
    8. Apply cross-sectional shapes

    Outcome 6: Student will identify the main manufacturing processes of composite products.

    1. Identify close-mold processes
    2. Identify open-mold processes
    3. Identify processes for short-fiber composite material
    4. Identify processes for continuous-fiber composite material

    Outcome 7: Student will understand the various joining techniques and be able to choose the best technique for a given application.

    1. Identify main joining techniques and their different characteristics
    2. Identify mechanical fastening systems
    3. Identify advantages and disadvantages of the discussed joining techniques
    4. Identify design of a joining area especially for the particular joining technique
    5. Identify hybrid joining methods
    6. Identify suitability of different joining methods for different demands
    7. Identify general issues and limitations
    8. Identify joining aluminum to other metals
    9. Identify joining aluminum to plastics and composites

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Aluminum

    1. Introduction to materials and engineering design
      1. Pre-assessment
      2. Design theory and methodology
      3. Design for manufacturing, assembly, functional performance, cost optimization and sustainability
    2. Mechanical and Physical Properties
      1. Applications-pros and cons
      2. Stress-strain curve
      3. Ashby charts
      4. Machining properties
      5. Galvanic corrosion and protection methods
    3. Products and manufacturing methods of aluminum
      1. Galvanic corrosion and protection methods
      2. Machining properties
      3. Use of non-conductive materials
    4. Characteristics of extruded products
      1. Basic types of extruded shapes, open, semi-closed and closed
      2. Variation of material thickness in cross sections
      3. Extrusion of inner and outer webs and fins
      4. Role of hollow profiles for joining extrusions
      5. High volume aluminum alloys-6060 and 6030
      6. Bumper beams in special 7xxx-series alloys
      7. Design guidelines

    Composites

    1. Introduction of fiber-reinforced composite material
      1. Definition of composite material
      2. Applications, pros and cons
      3. Fibers-carbon/glass/polymeric
      4. Matrices-thermoset-thermoplastics
    2. Manufacturing processes of composite materials
      1. Close-mold process
      2. Open-mold process
      3. Processes for short-fiber composite material
      4. Processes for continuous-fiber composite material

    Joining

    1. Joining techniques
      1. Joining techniques and their different characteristics
      2. Mechanical fastening systems
      3. Advantages and disadvantages of joining techniques
      4. Design of a joining area especially for the particular joining technique
      5. Hybrid joining methods
      6. Suitability of different joining methods for different demands

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Psychology

  
  • PSYC 1010 - Introductory Psychology


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Nature, scope, and methods of psychology as behavioral science, emphasizing development, biological foundation of behavior, sensation, and perception, learning, emotion, motivation, and personality.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the historical and current perspectives, or schools of thought.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the psychoanalytic theory.
    2. Describe behaviorism.
    3. Describe the humanistic theory.
    4. Describe the cognitive theory.
    5. Describe eclecticism.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the basic structure of the nervous and endocrine systems as they relate to behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Name components of the neuron (e.g. dendrite, cell body, axon, synapse, etc.).
    2. Describe neural communication.
    3. Describe how neurotransmitters work.
    4. Identify common hormones.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the overall development process from conception to death.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how and where fertilization occurs.
    2. Describe the three periods of prenatal development.
    3. Describe the development of language.
    4. Describe psychosocial development.
    5. Describe cognitive development.
    6. List factors involved in aging.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the basic principles of classical conditioning, operant conditioning, and social learning/observational learning and describe the role of memory as it relates to learning.

    Objectives:

    1. Define classical conditioning and its major components.
    2. Define operant conditioning and its major components.
    3. Define social learning/observational learning and its major components.
    4. Describe the three stores of memory (e.g. sensory, short-term, and long-term) and explain the processes of encoding, storage, and retrieval.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the forces that energize and direct behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the concept of the unconscious.
    2. Explain how the environment plays a role in behavior.
    3. Explain how culture plays a role in behavior.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe causes of and reaction to stress, including physical and psychological adaptations.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the fight-or-flight response.
    2. Explain Lazarus’ theory on the cognitive responses to stress.
    3. Explain how stress effects overall health.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the concept of personality and describe the major theoretical contributors.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify Freud’s concepts as they relate to personality development (e.g. structure of the personality, the unconscious, defense mechanisms, psychosexual stages).
    2. Name some individual contributors to the Trait Theory and their major concepts.
    3. Name some of the assessment measures used in studying personality.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the Science of Psychology
      1. Research Methods
        1. Experimental Method
        2. Correlational Method
        3. Descriptive Research Techniques
      2. Schools of Thought/Theoretical Perspectives
        1. Psychoanalytic/Psychodynamic Theory
        2. Behaviorism
        3. Humanistic Theory
        4. Cognitive Theory
        5. Eclecticism
    2. Biology and Behavior
      1. Neurons and Neurotransmitters
      2. Central Nervous System
        1. Brainstem
        2. Midbrain
        3. Limbic System
        4. Cerebral Cortex
      3. Peripheral Nervous System
      4. Endocrine System
      5. Brain Research Techniques
    3. Sensation and Perception
      1. Sensation and Sensory Organs
      2. Transduction
      3. Perception
    4. States of Consciousness
      1. Circadian Rhythm
      2. Sleep
        1. Stages
        2. Dream Research
      3. Other Altered States of Consciousness
        1. Meditation
        2. Hypnosis
      4. Psychoactive Substances
        1. Substance Abuse
        2. Substance Dependence
        3. Types of Psychoactive Drugs and Their Effects
    5. Learning
      1. Classical Conditioning
      2. Operant Conditioning
      3. Social Learning Theory (Observational Learning)
      4. Cognitive Learning
    6. Memory
      1. Sensory Memory
      2. Short-Term Memory
      3. Long-Term Memory
      4. The Process of Memory
        1. Encoding
        2. Storage
        3. Retrieval
      5. Forgetting
    7. Cognition, Language, and Intelligence
      1. Problem Solving and Decision Making
      2. Language Development
        1. Structure/Essential Components of Language
        2. Bilingualism
      3. Measuring Intelligence
        1. Psychometric Approach
        2. Other Approaches (Multiple Intelligences, Triarchic Theory)
      4. Creativity
    8. Human Development
      1. Heredity and Prenatal Development
      2. Stage Theories of Development
        1. Cognitive Development
        2. Psychosocial Development
        3. Moral Development
      3. Other Development Issues
        1. Attachment
        2. Temperament
        3. Socialization
        4. Physical Changes
        5. Puberty
        6. Aging
    9. Motivation and Emotion
      1. Theories of Motivation
        1. Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
        2. Arousal Theory
        3. Instinct Theory
      2. Hunger
        1. Eating Disorders
      3. Sexual Motives
      4. Social Motives
      5. Theories of Emotion
      6. Basic Emotions
    10. Personality
      1. Sigmund Freud and Psychoanalysis
        1. Id, Ego, Superego
        2. Defense Mechanisms
      2. Neo-Freudians
      3. Learning Theories and Personality
      4. Humanistic Theory and Personality
      5. Trait Theories
      6. Personality Assessment
    11. Health and Stress
      1. Sources of Stress
      2. Responding to Stress
        1. Physical Response
        2. Psychological Response
      3. Health and Illness
        1. Heart Disease
        2. Immune System
        3. Personality Factors
      4. Lifestyle and Health Behaviors
    12. Psychological Disorders
      1. Defining Abnormal Behavior
      2. Mood Disorders
        1. Depressive Disorders
        2. Bipolar Disorder
      3. Anxiety Disorders
        1. Generalized Anxiety Disorder
        2. Panic Disorder
        3. Phobias
        4. Obsessive-Compulsive Disorders
      4. Schizophrenia
      5. Personality Disorders
        1. Antisocial Personality Disorder
        2. Other Personality Disorders
      6. Other Psychological Disorders
        1. Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders
        2. Dissociative Disorders
        3. Sexual and Gender Identity Disorders
    13. Treatment
      1. Insight Therapies
        1. Psychodynamic
        2. Humanistic
      2. Relationship Therapies
        1. Group Therapy
        2. Couples Therapy
        3. Family Therapy
      3. Behavior Therapies
        1. Based on Classical Conditioning
        2. Based on Operant Conditioning
        3. Based on Social Learning/Observational Learning
      4. Cognitive Therapies
      5. Biological Therapies
        1. Antidepressants
        2. Antianxiety Medications
        3. Antipsychotic Medications
        4. Other Biologically Based Therapies
    14. Social Psychology
      1. Social Perception
      2. Attraction
      3. Social Influence
        1. Conformity
        2. Obedience
        3. Compliance
      4. Group Influences
      5. Attitudes
      6. Aggression
      7. Prosocial Behavior
      8. Prejudice and Discrimination

    Primary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Secondary Faculty
    Van Wormer, Sara
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2170 - Psychological Statistics


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly PSYC-2160) PSYC-2170 prepares students to apply descriptive and inferential statistics to psychological research. Topics include frequency distributions, measures of central tendency and variability, correlation and regression, hypothesis testing, z-scores, t-tests, analysis of variance, and chi-square. The course covers computational procedures, applications and interpretations, and the use of statistical computer software for data analysis. Recommended for prepsychology majors.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply basic statistical terms and measures.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the difference between populations and samples, descriptive and inferential statistics, and continuous and discrete variables.
    2. Identify and describe the scientific method and the design of research studies.
    3. Identify the various scales of measurement.
    4. Recognize and recall various statistical notations.
    5. Explain and create frequency distribution tables and graphs.
    6. Explain and compute measures of central tendency.
    7. Explain the concept of variability and compute variance and standard deviation.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain, compute, and apply z-scores.

    Objectives:

    1. Locate z-scores in a distribution, and explain how to use them to standardize a distribution.
    2. Explain the concept of probability and apply it to z-scores and the distribution of sample means.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concepts and statistical procedures of hypothesis testing using z-scores and the t-statistic.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and conduct hypothesis tests using z-scores
    2. Explain the concept of t, and conduct hypothesis tests with single-samples, independent samples, and related samples.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept and procedure of Analysis of Variance (ANOVA).

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and compute Analysis of Variance (ANOVA).
    2. Describe and explain the concepts and use of planned and unplanned comparisons, and post hoc tests (e.g., Tukey’s Honestly Significant Difference (HSD) test, and Scheffé test).

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept and statistical procedures of correlation and regression.

    Objectives:

    1. Calculate and interpret correlations including Pearson and point-biserial correlations.
    2. Calculate and interpret regression equations.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept and statistical procedures of chi-square.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the difference between parametric and nonparametric tests.
    2. Calculate and interpret the chi-square test for goodness of fit, and the chi-square test for independence.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of the course students will be able to explain and apply the procedures involved with the use of SPSS.

    Objectives:

    1. Use SPSS to enter, analyze, and interpret data including: frequency distributions, means, measures of variance, z-scores, t-tests, correlation and regression, and ANOVA.
    2. Interpret SPSS output.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to statistics:
      1. Populations and samples
      2. The scientific method and the design of research studies
      3. Variables and measurement
      4. Statistical notation
    2. Frequency Distributions:
      1. Frequency distribution tables
      2. Frequency distribution graphs
      3. The shape of the frequency distribution
    3. Central Tendency:
      1. The mean
      2. The median
      3. The mode
      4. Selecting a measure of central tendency
    4. Variability:
      1. The range
      2. Standard deviation and variance for a population and samples
    5. Z-scores:
      1. Z-scores and location in a distribution
      2. Using z-scores to standardize a distribution
    6. Probability:
      1. Probability and the normal distribution
      2. Probabilities and proportions for scores from a normal distribution
    7. Probability and samples:
      1. Samples and sampling error
      2. The distribution of sample means
    8. Introduction to hypothesis testing:
      1. Uncertainty and errors in hypothesis testing (e.g., type I/II error)
      2. Conducting hypothesis tests
      3. Measuring effect size and power
    9. Introduction to the t-statistic:
      1. The t-statistic as an alternative to z
      2. Hypothesis tests with the t-statistic
    10. The t-test for two independent samples:
      1. The t-statistic for an independent-measures research design
      2. Assumptions
    11. The t-test for two related samples:
      1. The t-statistic for related samples
      2. Assumptions
    12. Estimation:
      1. Estimation with the t-statistic
    13. Introduction to analysis of variance (ANOVA):
      1. ANOVA notation and formulas
      2. The distribution of F-ratios
      3. Hypothesis testing and effect size with ANOVA
      4. Post hoc tests
    14. Repeated-measures and two-factor analysis of variance:
      1. Conducting repeated-measures ANOVA
      2. Conducting two-factor ANOVA
    15. Correlation and Regression:
      1. Using and interpreting the Pearson correlation
      2. Hypothesis tests with Pearson correlation
      3. The Point-biserial correlation
      4. Introduction to regression
    16. The chi-square statistic:
      1. Parametric and nonparametric statistical tests
      2. The chi-square test for goodness of fit
      3. The chi-square test for independence
      4. Measuring effect size
      5. Assumptions and restrictions
    17. SPSS Lab
      1. Entering data in SPSS
      2. Using SPSS to create frequency distribution graphs and tables
      3. Using SPSS to get mean, variance, standard deviation, and z-scores
      4. Using SPSS for t-tests, correlation, regression, and ANOVA
      5. Interpretation of SPSS output

    Primary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2210 - Child Growth & Development


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Sequential development from conception to adolescence covering physical, intellectual, emotional, and social patterns of growth.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the major theories of child growth and development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the major theories of prenatal and physical development.
    2. Describe the major theories of cognitive development as it relates to children.
    3. Describe language development from both the nativist and learning perspective.
    4. Describe social development as it relates to temperament, attachment, gender, and morality.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply research findings to child growth and development.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the method of research used to study child development.
    2. Identify strengths and weaknesses in research studies that pertain to child growth and development.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking skills as it relates to matters of child development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the concept of teratogens and explain how it could affect the developing fetus.
    2. Describe the concept of attachment and explain how it plays a role in development.
    3. Describe the importance of environment and explain how schools, media, and culture can influence child development.
    4. Describe the different parenting styles and explain the role it plays in development.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of contemporary issues in society and their impact upon children.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the different types of child abuse and explain how it affects all aspects of child growth and development.
    2. Explain the importance of standardized intelligence testing as it relates to children with special educational needs.
    3. Understand the psychological disorders that effect children as per the DSM 5 such as Intellectual Disability, ADHD and Autism Spectrum Disorder.
    4. Explain the effects of acceptance, neglect, and rejection by peers and how that may affect the course of child development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Child Growth and Development
      1. Theories About Development
        1. Psychoanalytic Theory
        2. Behavioral and Social Learning Theories
        3. Cognitive Theories
        4. Biological Theories
        5. Systems Theories
      2. Research Methods Used in Child Growth and Development
        1. Descriptive Research Methods
        2. Correlational Method
        3. Experiemental Method
        4. Other Methods for Assessing Development
        5. Ethics in Research With Children
    2. Genes and Heredity
      1. Genes, Chromosomes, and DNA
      2. Inheritance and Genetic Abnormalities
        1. Dominant-Recessive Traits
        2. Chromosomal Abnormalities
        3. Prenatal Screening and Genetic Testing
      3. Interaction of Genes and Environment
        1. Canalization
        2. Niche-Picking
      4. Heritability
    3. Prenatal Development and Birth
      1. Conception and Stages of Prenatal Development
      2. Teratogens
      3. Birth
      4. The Neonate
        1. Prematurity
        2. Low Birth Weight
        3. Infant Mortality
    4. Physical Development
      1. Reflexes
      2. Development of the Brain and Nervous System
        1. Neurons
        2. Brain/Neural Plasticity
      3. Physical Growth
        1. Cephalocaudal Trend
        2. Proximodistal Trend
        3. Sexual Maturation
      4. Perceptual Development
        1. Visual Preferences
        2. Habituation-Dishabituation Research
        3. Other Perceptual Development
    5. Cognitive Development
      1. Jean Piaget
      2. Lev Vygotsky
      3. Information Processing Theory
    6. Intelligence and Academic Skills
      1. History of Intelligence
      2. Psychometric Approaches
        1. Stanford Binet
        2. Wechsler Series
      3. Sternberg’s Triarchic Theory
      4. Gardner’s Multiple Intelligences Theory
      5. Creativity
      6. Development of Academic Skills
        1. Numbers and Mathematics
        2. Reading
        3. Writing
    7. Language Development
      1. Elements of Language
      2. Theories of Language Development
      3. Emergence of Language
        1. Infancy
        2. Early Childhood
        3. Middle Childhood and Adolescence
    8. Social Development
      1. Attachment
      2. Temperament
      3. Emotions
    9. Development of Self, Gender, and Morality
      1. Theories of Self
      2. Development of Gender
      3. Moral Development
    10. Peers, Play, Popularity
      1. Peer Relationships and Friendships
      2. Popular Children
      3. Rejected Children
      4. Neglected Children
    11. Families
      1. Parenting
      2. Discipline
      3. Changing Family Structures
      4. Child Care Issues
    12. Influences Outside the Family
      1. Schools
      2. Media
      3. Culture
    13. Children With Special Needs
      1. Emotional and Behavioral Problems
      2. Developmental and Learning Problems
      3. Child Maltreatment: Abuse and Neglect
      4. Children Who Thrive: Gifted, Talented, and Resilient

    Primary Faculty
    Wickline, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2220 - Psychology of Adolescence


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Physical, intellectual, emotional, and social development of the adolescent, including processes in personality stabilization.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking re: biological and sociocultural matters impacting adolescents.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Explain how physical development and puberty influence adolescent development.
    2. Discuss the health implications of today’s adolescence.
    3. Discuss the changes that influence the American family and the effects these changes have on developing adolescents.
    4. Describe how media influences adolescent development.
    5. Discuss sexual development and sexuality during adolescence.
    6. Discuss biological and environmental factors associated with sexuality during adolescence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain cognitive and behavioral aspects of adolescent development.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Understand the theories of cognitive development and how they can be applied in today’s society.
    2. Discuss the concept of moral development during adolescence.
    3. Understand the brain development that occurs during adolescence.
    4. Understand factors that contribute to adolescent risk taking.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply knowledge applicable to living and/or working with adolescent youth.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the role of the adolescent in the family system.
    2. Explain how parenting style affects the parent-adolescent relationship.
    3. Discuss the common view point held by adults related to adolescence and their impact in social interactions.
    4. Describe the impact of school and work on adolescent development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Growth
    2. Cognitive growth
    3. Families
    4. Peers
    5. Schools
    6. Media
    7. Identity
    8. Love and Sex
    9. Morality and Religion
    10. Careers

    Primary Faculty
    Wickline, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2300 - Psychology of Adjustment


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    The process of personal adjustment including ways of coping with stress and learning constructive patterns of behavior.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe theories related to both effective and ineffective adjustment strategies.

    Objectives:

    1. Summarize appropriate research on the connection between daily events and stress.
    2. Identify ways to promote and maintain adjustment in daily life.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the impact of coping strategies on common sources of stress.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify two ways in which stress can impact both physiological and psychological health
    2. Describe three effective coping strategies and explain how they minimize stress.
    3. Describe the role of gender, ethnicity, and socioeconomic factors in the reaction to and ability to cope with stress.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the factors necessary to create and maintain effective social relationships

    Objectives:

    1. Describe at least four social factors that influence communication in relationships
    2. Identify three effective verbal and nonverbal communication skills that influence positive relations
    3. Summarize the role of context in relationship communication.
    4. Summarize the research findings on same gender friendships, opposite gender friendships and romantic relationships (both heterosexual and homosexual).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply daily living to the psychological principles of adjustment.

    Objectives:

    1. List three social and/or cultural factors that contribute to identity development.
    2. Describe three theories of identity development.
    3. Summarize the role of personality in identity development.
    4. Name common difficulties that may occur in the process of identity development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Stress
      1. Stressors
      2. Stress Management
    2. Physical Health
      1. Effects of Stress on Health
      2. Adjustment and Health
    3. Psychological Disorders
      1. Definitions
      2. Causes
      3. Theoretical perspectives
    4. Social Thinking
      1. Conformity
      2. Prejudice
      3. Group Influence
    5. Interpersonal Communications
      1. Cross‐cultural Perspectives
      2. Communication
    6. Friendship and Love
    7. Marriage and Committed Relationships
    8. Gender
      1. Gender Definitions
      2. Theories of Identification
      3. Impact of Gender Roles
    9. Sexuality
      1. Heterosexuality
      2. Homosexuality
      3. Scientific Evidence
    10. Careers

    Primary Faculty
    Van Wormer, Sara
    Secondary Faculty
    Karlis, Lynda
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2310 - Educational Psychology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course is designed to integrate psychological principles with teaching and learning. Emphasis will focus on developmental theories, cognitive and behavioral learning theories, information processing, motivation, individual differences, instructional approaches, and assessment.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the developmental theories as related to learning and teaching.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the ways in which theories of cognitive development as related to learning and teaching.
    2. Summarize the influence of Erikson’s theory of psychosocial development influence on a student’s personality development.
    3. Identify the ways in which cognitive development influences moral thinking and behavior.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to apply the different views of learning and motivation to learning and teaching.

    Objectives:

    1. Relate behavioral and social cognitive approaches to learning and teaching.
    2. Apply the components of the informational processing theory to learning.
    3. Explain how thinking, problem solving, and social constructivism apply to learning and teaching.
    4. Illustrate how the theories of motivation apply to learning and teaching.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able analyze the impact of individual differences on learning.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret the research on differences in intelligence, learning styles and creativity to improve instruction and assessment.
    2. Identify group differences in socioeconomic status, ethnicity, gender and language as related to learning and instruction.
    3. Describe how to accommodate for student variability in the classroom including intellectual disabilities, learning disabilities, emotional disturbances and gifted and talented students.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to analyze different methods of teaching and assessing.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between the different approaches to classroom management.
    2. Contrast the different approaches to classroom instruction.
    3. Compare the different classroom assessment, grading, and standardized testing techniques.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Educational Psychology
      1. Research Methods of Educational Psychology
      2. Developmental Theories Related to Learning
        1. Piaget’s Stages of Cognitive Development
        2. Vygotsky’s Sociocultural Theory
        3. Erikson’s Psychosocial Development
    2. Individual Variations in Learning
      1. Intelligence
      2. Learning Styles
      3. Students with Disabilities
      4. Gifted Students
    3. Group Differences in Learning
      1. Socioeconomic
      2. Culture and Ethnicity
      3. Gender
      4. Language
    4. Approaches to Learning
      1. Behavioral Approach
      2. Social Cognitive Approach
      3. Informational Processing Approach
      4. Thinking and Problem Solving
      5. Social Constructivist Approach
    5. Methods of Teaching and Learning
      1. Motivation and Achievement
      2. Classroom Management Techniques
      3. Lesson Planning
      4. Technology and Education
      5. Classroom Assessment and Grading
      6. Standardized Testing

    Primary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2400 - Industrial-Organizational Psychology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    The purpose of this course is to apply psychological research and theory to issues in the workplace to provide a basis for understanding individual and group behavior at work. Topics include the psychological underpinnings of employee selection and training, performance appraisal, motivation and job satisfaction, group processes, and power and leadership in organizations.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the field of Industrial and Organizational (I/O) Psychology.

    Objectives:

    1. Define industrial and organizational psychology.
    2. Describe the various roles of I/O psychologists.
    3. Describe the major historical events in industrial and organizational psychology.
    4. Describe & distinguish among the research methods used in I/O psychology.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of job analysis and its uses in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the job analysis process.
    2. Describe the various methods used for job analysis.
    3. Using information obtained from a job analysis, write a job description.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the employee selection process.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the components of the employee selection process.
    2. Describe key legal issues in employee selection.
    3. Identify advantages and disadvantages of selection techniques.
    4. Describe methods used for selection decisions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the employee performance appraisal process.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify components of the employee appraisal process.
    2. Describe and differentiate among performance appraisal methods.
    3. Identify the problems associated with performance ratings.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of employee training in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the components and purpose of training needs assessment.
    2. Describe various training methods and techniques.
    3. Describe training evaluation strategies.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast theories of motivation and how they relate to job performance.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the major theories of work motivation.
    2. Given a description of a situation, apply the appropriate motivation theory or theories.
    3. Describe and distinguish among individual differences and organizational contributions to work motivation.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of groups and group dynamics.

    Objectives:

    1. Define work groups.
    2. Describe conformity and group cohesiveness and their impact on satisfaction and performance.
    3. Describe causes of conflict.
    4. Describe conflict resolution strategies.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of leadership and the use of power in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify major topics in leadership research.
    2. Describe the theoretical approaches to leadership.
    3. Identify potential diversity issues in leadership.
    4. Identify the bases of power and their use in organizations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Industrial/Organizational Psychology
      1. Definitions
        1. What is industrial/organizational psychology?
        2. The science and practice of industrial/organizational psychology
      2. The roots and early history of industrial/organizational psychology
        1. The beginnings
        2. World War I and the 1920s
        3. The Great Depression years and World War II
        4. The postwar years and the modern era
        5. Industrial/organizational psychology today in the future
    2. Job Analysis
      1. Job analysis methods
        1. Observation, participation, existing data, interviews, survey, job diaries
      2. Specific job analysis techniques
        1. Job element method functional job analysis (FJA)
        2. Position analysis questionnaire (PAQ)
        3. Research using the PAQ
        4. Critical incidents technique (CIT)
        5. Comparing the different job analysis techniques
        6. Job analysis of ADA
        7. Job evaluation of comparable worth
    3. Employee Selection
      1. Steps in the employee selection process
      2. Employee recruitment
      3. Employee screening
        1. Evaluation of written materials
        2. References and letters of recommendation
        3. Employment testing
        4. Considerations of the development and use of personal screening and testing methods
        5. Types of employment screening tests
        6. The effectiveness of employee screening tests
        7. Assessments centers
        8. Hiring interviews
      4. Employee selection and placement
        1. Making employee selection decisions
        2. Employee placement equal employment opportunity and employee selection and placement
        3. Testing disable job applicants
    4. Evaluating Employee Performance
      1. Job performance and performance appraisals
      2. The measurement of job performance
        1. Objective versus subjective performance criteria
        2. Sources of performance ratings
      3. Methods of reading performance
        1. Comparative methods
        2. Individual methods
      4. The performance appraisal process
        1. Legal concerns and performance appraisals
        2. Team appraisals and the future of performance appraisals
    5. Employee Training and Development
      1. Areas of employment training
        1. New employee orientation and training
        2. Retraining and continuing education programs
        3. Team training.
      2. Fundamental issues in employee training
        1. Key issues in the success of training programs
        2. Transfer of training, trainee readiness, training program structure
        3. Common problems and employee training programs
      3. A model for successful training program
      4. Diversity and equal employment opportunity issues and employee training
    6. Motivation
      1. Defining Motivation
      2. Need theories of motivation
      3. Behavior based theories of motivation
      4. Job design theories of motivation
      5. Rational theories of motivation
      6. Comparing, contrasting, and combining the different motivation theories
      7. The relationship between motivation and performance
    7. Employee Attitudes and Behaviors
      1. Increasing job satisfaction and organizational commitment
      2. Positive employee attitudes and behaviors
      3. Negative employee attitudes and behaviors
      4. Sources of workers stress
        1. Stressful occupations
        2. Organizational and individual sources of work stress
    8. Group Processes in Work Organizations
      1. Defining teams and workgroups
      2. Group processes
      3. Group decision‐making processes
      4. Teams and teamwork
    9. Leadership
      1. Universalist theories of leadership
      2. Behavioral theories of leadership
      3. Contingency theory of leadership
      4. Additional leadership theories
      5. Comparing and contrasting theories of leadership

    Primary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    Cobb, April
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2450 - Lifespan Development


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (Effective Fall 2009: course description changed) This course traces biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social development across the life span, culminating in a synthesis of a multifaceted view of the individual as infant, child, adolescent, and adult.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss developmental themes central to a lifespan perspective on development.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the lifespan perspective, using examples.
    2. Define the processes, periods, and issues of development, using examples.
    3. Describe the contrasting developmental issues of nature‐nurture, stability‐change, and continuity‐discontinuity.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the major theories of development through examples of research methodology used.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the focus, strengths, and weaknesses of psychoanalytic, cognitive, behavioral, and ethological theories of development.
    2. Using examples, compare and contrast the theories listed above
    3. Using examples, compare and contrast the cross‐sectional approach, the longitudinal approach, and the sequential approach to research.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to describe the age‐related tasks and basic milestones of biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social development.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the processes and milestones of biological development.
    2. Describe the processes and milestones of cognitive development, including information processing, language, and intelligence.
    3. Describe the processes and milestones of socioemotional development, including emotions, personality, identity, and morality.
    4. Describe the processes and milestones of social development, including relationships with family, peers, school, and coworkers.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to synthesize topical developmental information into a complete picture of the individual at each stage of development.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the infant in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.
    2. Describe the child in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.
    3. Describe the adolescent in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.
    4. Describe the adult in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. The lifespan perspective
    2. Research in lifespan development
    3. Theories of development
    4. Physical processes and development
    5. Cognitive processes and development
    6. Socioemotional processes and development
    7. Social contexts of development
    8. Synthesis of the strands of development into a picture of the whole person
    9. Major issues and controversies in lifespan developmental psychology
    10. Major issues related to death and dying

    Primary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2500 - Human Sexuality


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Sexuality of the total personality concerned with the biological, psychological, and social factors that affect personality and interpersonal relationships.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and describe the diversity of human sexuality.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how sexuality is a uniquely human trait.
    2. Explain and describe the evolution of human sexuality.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply theories about sexuality and basic scientific research methods.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and apply the various theoretical perspectives of human sexuality (e.g., psychological, biological, sociological, sociobiological, etc.).
    2. Identify, explain, and describe the research of pertinent investigators in the field of human sexuality.
    3. Describe the main concepts of the scientific method and basic research designs.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept involved with gender.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the process of gender development.
    2. Identify, explain, and describe gender roles.
    3. Identify, explain, and describe gender identity.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the differences between the male and female reproductive systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and explain the sexual anatomy and physiology of males.
    2. Identify and explain the sexual anatomy and physiology of females.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the components of communication in sexual behavior.

    Obectives:

    1. Identify and explain various aspects of successful communication.
    2. Identify and explain techniques of giving and receiving constructive criticism.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and describe the role of love and intimacy in the development of sexual relationships.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and describe the different forms of love.
    2. Identify and describe the process involved in the development of intimacy.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and describe the development of sexuality in childhood, adolescence, and adulthood.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and describe the physical, cognitive, and psychosocial development of sexuality during childhood.
    2. Identify, explain, and describe the physical, cognitive, and psychosocial development of sexuality during adolescence.
    3. Identify, explain, and describe the physical, cognitive, and psychosocial development of sexuality during adulthood.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe the components of sexual behaviors.

    Obectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and describe the process of sexual arousal and response.
    2. Identify and describe various forms of sexual expression.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the concept of sexual orientation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain and describe the theoretical perspectives of what determines sexual orientation.
    2. Explain and describe the obstacles that individuals who identify as LGBT (Lesbian, Gay, Bi‐sexual and Transgendered) are faced with (e.g., societal attitudes, coming out, homophobia etc.).

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and explain the process of pregnancy and birth.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain and describe the aspects involved with fertility and infertility.
    2. Identify, explain, and describe the process of pregnancy.
    3. Identify and explain various problems during pregnancy.

    Outcome 11: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, describe, and explain the different forms of contraception and processes of abortion.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, describe, and explain the use and effectiveness of various forms of contraceptives (barrier, hormonal, chemical, IUDs, fertility awareness, and surgical).
    2. Identify, describe and explain the different types of abortion methods.

    Outcome 12: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and explain the various challenges to sexual functioning and treatments.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the nature of various sexual difficulties (desire, sexual arousal, orgasm, and pain disorders).
    2. Explain the origin of sexual difficulties.
    3. Describe and explain various treatment methods.

    Outcome 13: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, describe, and explain various STIs and HIV/AIDS.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the nature of various sexual difficulties (bacterial, viral, and ectoparasitic infections; and HIV/AIDS).
    2. Explain the origin of various STIs.
    3. Describe ways of preventing STIs and AIDS.

    Outcome 14: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe various noncoercive and coercive paraphilias.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the nature of various noncoercive and coercive paraphilias.
    2. Explain the origin of various noncoercive and coercive paraphilias.
    3. Describe ways of treating pariahilias.

    Outcome 15: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, describe, and explain the factors associated with sexual victimization.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, describe, and explain the factors associated with rape and other forms of sexual assault.
    2. Identify, describe, and explain the factors associated with sexual harassment.

    Outcome 16: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and explain the factors involved with sexual images and the selling of sex.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the impact of sexuality in the media.
    2. Describe and explain the impact of pornography.
    3. Describe and explain the impact of prostitution.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Perspectives on sexuality
    2. Theory and research
    3. Gender issues
    4. Male and female sexual anatomy and physiology
    5. Communication
    6. Love and intimacy
    7. Childhood, adolescent, and adulthood sexuality
    8. Arousal and response
    9. Sexual orientation
    10. Pregnancy and birth
    11. Contraception and abortion
    12. Sexual difficulties
    13. STIs
    14. Atypical sexual behaviors
    15. Sexual victimization
    16. Sexual images and selling sex

    Primary Faculty
    Wickline, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2550 - Psychology of Gender


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    PSYC-2550 explores psychological theories and research related to gender issues. Topics include the nature and meaning of gender, gender roles, sex similarities and differences, stereotypes, and gender issues in various aspects of the human experience including interpersonal relationships, mental and physical health, sexuality, and work.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of research approaches to the psychological study of gender.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe and distinguish between qualitative and quantitative research methods.
    2. Identify potential sources of bias at each step in the research process.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the contribution of various psychological perspectives and theories to our understanding of gender.

    1. Compare and contrast the psychodynamic, social learning, and cognitive approaches to gender.
    2. Describe the process of gender identity development.
    3. Identify the biological and social factors that contribute to gender development.
    4. Describe cultural variations in gender role definitions and attitudes.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the development and impact of gender stereotypes.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the historical origins of gender stereotypes.
    2. Describe the formation and function of gender stereotypes.
    3. Describe cultural influences and variations in gender stereotypes.
    4. Describe the individual and social effects of gender stereotypes.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues with regard to cognitive ability.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast popular conceptions and key research findings comparing males and females in cognitive ability.
    2. Describe the practical significance and implications of differences and perceptions of differences.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in interpersonal relationships.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe similarities and differences in the ways interpersonal relationships are experienced by men and women.
    2. Describe the connection between gender and power in relationships.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in mental and physical health.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe gender similarities and differences in health and fitness.
    2. Describe gender issues in access and utilization of medical care.
    3. Describe similarities and differences in men’s and women’s sources of stress and coping resources and strategies.
    4. Identify gender issues in the diagnosis and treatment of psychological disorders.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in sexual attitudes and behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast the physiology of male and female sexual responses.
    2. Describe and critique methods for studying human sexual attitudes and behavior.
    3. Describe the development of sexual orientation.
    4. Identify issues and controversies in the concept of sexual orientation.
    5. Describe cultural variations in accepted sexual attitudes and behaviors.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in the workplace.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe sex similarities and differences in career expectations and opportunities.
    2. Identify the factors that contribute to differences in men’s and women’s careers and rewards at work.
    3. Describe the relationships among sexuality, power, and sexual harassment in the workplace.
    4. Describe the impact of sexual harassment in the workplace.
    5. Identify barriers to workplace diversity.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Studying sex and gender in psychology
      1. History and issues in the study of sex and gender in psychology
      2. Approaches to research
        1. Qualitative and quantitative methods
      3. Sources of bias in gender research
    2. Gender stereotypes
      1. Origin of stereotypes
      2. Development and implications of stereotypes
    3. Theories of gender development
      1. Psychodynamic approach
      2. Social Learning theory
      3. Cognitive theories
        1. Cognitive developmental theory
        2. Gender schema theory
    4. Development of gender identity
      1. Influences on gender identity development
        1. Biological factors and gender development
        2. Family and peer influences on gender development
        3. Media and cultural influences on gender development
    5. Intelligence and cognitive abilities
      1. Sources of identified differences
      2. Implications of gender differences
    6. Interpersonal relationships
      1. Friendship
      2. Love relationships
    7. Sexuality
      1. The study of sexuality
      2. Heterosexuality
      3. Homosexuality
      4. Bisexuality
    8. Careers and work
      1. Career expectations and gender stereotypes
      2. Career opportunities
      3. Gender issues at work
        1. Gender segregation
        2. Communication and power
        3. Sexual harassment
    9. Health and fitness
      1. Mortality
      2. The health care system
      3. Gender, lifestyle, health and fitness
    10. Stress and coping
      1. Sources of stress for men and women
      2. Comparison of coping resources and strategies used by men and women
    11. Psychopathology
      1. Gender issues in the diagnosis of psychological disorders
      2. Gender comparisons in depression, substance abuse, anxiety, and other disorders.
      3. Gender issues in therapy
        1. Feminist therapy
        2. Therapy with men
        3. Gender‐sensitive therapies
    12. Cross‐cultural issues and gender
      1. Interaction between ethnic and gender stereotypes
      2. Cultural influences and variation in sex stereotypes
      3. Cultural variations in gender role definitions and attitudes
      4. Cultural variations in accepted sexual attitudes and behaviors.

    Primary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2600 - Social Psychology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Social psychology is the scientific study of the effects of social and cognitive processes on the way individuals perceive, relate to, and influence others.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe social psychology’s research methods, with reference to key experiments in the field.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast correlational and experimental research methods.
    2. Discuss the design, results, and conclusions of major studies by major social psychologists (e.g., Asch, Milgram, Zimbardo, etc.).

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the fundamental principles of social cognition and social affect.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the sources and uses of social knowledge.
    2. Describe the ways in which emotions inform us about our social relationships.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the personal and situational factors that contribute to the individual’s perception of the self, other individuals, and groups.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast self‐concept, self‐esteem, social comparison, and social identity.
    2. Describe the basic principles of impression formation and attribution.
    3. Discuss the factors that influence social group process and performance.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the processes of social influence at work in attitude formation, persuasion, conformity, and obedience.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the variables that affect attitude strength, attitude‐behavior relationships, and attitude change.
    2. Outline the person and situation factors that determine the effectiveness of persuasion.
    3. Compare and contrast conformity and obedience with respect to the person and situation variables that influence each.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the personal and situational factors that play a role in social interaction, including attraction, prosocial behavior, aggression, and group performance and decision‐making.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the personal and situational variables that influence the behavior of individuals in a given social interaction.
    2. Identify examples of the influence of gender and culture on social interaction.
    3. List two methods for developing a social‐responsibility norm.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination with regard to the relative influences of person and situation factors in each.
    2. Identify the impact of both social cognition and social affect in the development and prevention of stereotyping and prejudice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to social psychology
    2. Research methods
    3. Social cognition
    4. Social affect
    5. The self
    6. Attitudes and behavior
    7. Persuasion
    8. Perceiving others
    9. Social influence
    10. Attraction
    11. Prosocial behavior
    12. Aggression
    13. Groups
    14. Stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination

    Primary Faculty
    Wakevainen, Edythe
    Secondary Faculty
    Karlis, Lynda
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2700 - Psychology of Health: Mind & Body Interaction


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    A detailed overview of the psychological factors influencing health, illness, and the healing process including current scientific research, the impact of stress and coping, personality and health, the psychology of complementary medicine, living with chronic conditions, and closure, death and dying.

    Prerequisites:
    PSYC-1010

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the basics of the professional practice of health psychology.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the biopsychosocial model of health.
    2. List at least three situations in which a health psychologist would be consulted.
    3. Describe the research methodologies used in health psychology.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the interplay between one’s physical well-being and biological, psychological, and social factors.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the impact of health disparities on the prevalence of disease in our society.
    2. Identify the factors that promote and create barriers to good health behaviors.
    3. Describe the basic guidelines for a healthy diet and exercise plan.
    4. Describe health-compromising behaviors and why people engage in them.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain how cognitive and socioemotional factors affect health.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify at least three ways in which stress affects health and disease.
    2. Describe the recommended strategies for coping with stress.
    3. Outline the sociocultural influences on well-being and resilience.
    4. Identify the ways by which behavioral and cognitive-behavioral interventions may promote changes in health behaviors.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between allopathy with complementary and alternative medicine.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe trends in the prevalence of complementary and alternative medicine in the United States.
    2. Identify the basic principles of naturopathy and discuss the pros and cons of herbal medicine.
    3. Describe at least three different forms of complementary and alternative medicine and their effects on health.
    4. Discuss the effectiveness of food supplement therapy and dietary medicine in treating disease and in promoting health.

     


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. An Introduction to Health Psychology
      1. Defining Health Psychology
      2. Role of the Health Psychologist
      3. The Biopsychosocial Model
      4. Health Care in the United States
      5. Historical Views of Health
      6. Lifespan Development Perspective
      7. Research Methods in Health Psychology
      8. Ethics in Research
    2. Health Beliefs and Behaviors
      1. Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
      2. Practicing Healthful Behaviors
      3. Helping with Behavioral Change
    3. Health-Enhancing Behaviors
      1. Healthy Diet and Weight
      2. Physical Fitness and Exercise
      3. The Importance of Sleep
      4. Injury Prevention
    4. Health-Compromising Behaviors
      1. Understanding Health-Compromising Behavior
      2. Diet and Obesity
      3. Eating Disorders
      4. Substance Use
      5. Smoking and Nicotine
      6. Drinking and Alcohol
      7. Risky Sexual Behavior
    5. Understanding Stress
      1. Understanding Stress
      2. The Physiology of Stress
      3. The Psychosocial Aspects of Stress
      4. Measuring Stress
      5. Stress Effects on the Brain and Body
      6. Responses to Stress
      7. Coping with Stress
    6. Illness, Pain and Disease
      1. Psychoneuroimmunology
      2. The Immune System
      3. Recognizing Pain
      4. Physiology of Pain
      5. Treating Pain
      6. Chronic Illness
      7. Autoimmune Diseases
      8. Risk Factors for Illness and Disease
      9. Preventing and Treating Illness and Disease
      10. The Mind-Body Connection
      11. Emotional Responses to Chronic Illness
      12. Coping with Chronic Illness
      13. Terminal Illness
    7. Health Services and Providers
      1. Types of Health Care Services
      2. Health Insurance and Access to Care
      3. Seeking Treatment
      4. Compliance
      5. The Patient-Practitioner Relationship
    8. Complementary and Alternative Medicine
      1. Understanding Complementary and Alternative Medicine
      2. Effectiveness of Complementary and Alternative Medicine
      3. Acupuncture
      4. Biofeedback
      5. Chiropractic
      6. Nutrition
      7. Naturopathic Medicine

    Primary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Wickline, Karen
    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2750 - Brain & Behavior


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course explores the neural mechanisms that underlie people’s thoughts, feelings, and actions. Topics include the biological bases of sensation and perception, movement, brain plasticity, memory and amnesia, eating, sex, sleep, addiction, emotion, stress, language, and psychological disorders.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the structure and function of the nervous system, including its cells and structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe in detail the general layout of the nervous system.
    2. List the major structures found within each of the five divisions of the brain, and their functions.
    3. Compare and contrast the processes of communication within and between neurons.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the biological bases of sensation and perception.

    Objectives:

    1. Trace the pathway of a given sensory system from the periphery to the cortex.
    2. Explain the concept of “receptive field” with reference to the levels of the visual pathway.
    3. Discuss the three principles of sensory system organization with reference to a given sensory system.
    4. Describe two patients with perceptual difficulties, and discuss the relationship between their symptoms and underlying brain abnormalities.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the structure and function of the motor systems of the body.

    Objectives:

    1. List the brain areas involved in movement.
    2. Compare and contrast the four descending motor pathways.
    3. Explain the concept of a “sensorimotor program” with reference to a case study of a patient with movement problems.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to describe the causes, outcomes, and treatment of damage to the nervous system.

    Objectives:

    1. List six causes of brain damage.
    2. Compare and contrast the causes and symptoms of two of the major neuropsychological diseases.
    3. Identify the ways in which the nervous system responds to damage
    4. Describe the ways in which nervous system damage is treated in medical and rehabilitative settings.

    Outcome 5: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the brain mechanisms of learning, memory and amnesia.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast the causes and symptoms of two of the major forms of amnesia.
    2. Identify the brain areas involved in storing memories.
    3. Describe changes at the synaptic level that could underlie memory formation.

    Outcome 6: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the biological bases of motivated behaviors including eating, sex, and sleep.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the internal (physiological) and external factors involved in hunger and satiety, both normal and abnormal.
    2. Discuss the role of hormones and the nervous system in sexual behavior and sexual orientation.
    3. List the brain areas involved in sleep and sleep disorders.

    Outcome 7: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of the nervous system in addiction, emotion, stress, and language.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how the brain changes as a result of drug addiction.
    2. Identify the brain areas involved in emotion.
    3. Explain how the brain and the immune system are affected by stress.
    4. Describe the “split brain” operation and explain what it has revealed about the biological basis of language and language disorders.

    Outcome 8: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the biological bases of psychiatric disorders, including schizophrenia, depression, bipolar disorder, and anxiety disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the causes, symptoms and treatment of schizophrenia with reference to the brain.
    2. Compare and contrast the biology of affective disorders and anxiety disorders, including brain mechanisms and treatment.
    3. Summarize the controversy around the use of psychotherapeutic medications.

    Outcome 9: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to think critically about biopsychology.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how the scientific method is used to study brain and behavior relationships.
    2. Discuss the connections between academic material in biopsychology and real world issues (e.g. ethics, personal health, etc.)
    3. Explain how an understanding of the diseased or damaged brain informs our understanding of the normal brain, with reference to clinical case studies.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Foundations of Biopsychology
      1. Introduction to the Study of Brain and Behavior
      2. Anatomy of the Nervous System
      3. Physiology of the Nervous System
    2. Sensory and Motor Systems
      1. Sample Sensory System: Vision
      2. Perceptual Mechanisms
      3. The Sensorimotor System
    3. Brain Plasticity
      1. Nervous System Development
      2. Brain Damage and Neuroplasticity
      3. Learning, Memory, and Amnesia
    4. Biopsychology of Motivation
      1. Hunger and Eating
      2. Sex
      3. Sleep and Circadian Rhythms
    5. Biopsychology of Health
      1. Addiction, Emotion, and Stress
      2. Lateralization, Language, and the Split Brain
      3. Psychological Disorders

    Primary Faculty
    Wakevainen, Edythe
    Secondary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2760 - Neuropsychology


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    PSYC-2760 explores the relationship between the human brain and behavior and mental processes, using primarily experimental evidence from normal participants and clinical evidence from brain damaged patients. Following an overview of neuroanatomy, neurophysiology, and neuropsychological techniques, the course will examine disorders of movement, perception, memory, language, emotion, spatial ability, attention, and consciousness, with reference to deviations from normal functioning.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the structure and function of the nervous system.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the structure and function of neurons and glial cells.
    2. Describe communication within and between neurons.
    3. Discuss the roles of the spinal cord and peripheral nervous system.
    4. Describe the major divisions of the brain and the structures found in each division.
    5. Compare and contrast the structures and functions of the right and left cerebral hemispheres.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the various processes and strategies that neuropsychologists use to study the intact and damaged nervous system.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the scope and focus of neuropsychology.
    2. Describe the major techniques in studying the damaged nervous system, in brain imaging, and in assessing laterality.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe specific ways in which motor and perceptual functions may change subsequent to brain damage.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe cortical and subcortical motor disorders with reference to normal sensorimotor system structure and function.
    2. Describe visual perceptual deficits with reference to normal visual system structure and function.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to With reference to current theories, explain specific ways in which higher mental processes may change subsequent to brain damage.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss common disorders of memory, including amnesias and dementias.
    2. Discuss common disorders of language, including aphasia, alexia, and agraphia.
    3. Discuss disorders of emotion, including lack of affect, the Kluver‐Bucy syndrome, and mood disorders.
    4. Discuss disorders of personal and extrapersonal space.
    5. Discuss disorders of attention and consciousness.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to Describe how the brain can be damaged both during and after development, as well as the implications of that damage.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss developmental disorders, including dyslexia, attention deficit disorder, and autism.
    2. Explain the effects of tumors, stroke, head injuries, infections, and neurotoxins on the brain and behavior and mental processes.
    3. Explain how neurological and psychiatric diseases affect both the brain and behavior and mental processes.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to Relate the work of neuropsychology to your chosen profession.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain what occurs in a neuropsychological assessment.
    2. Discuss the major issues in neuropsychological assessment.
    3. Describe the therapeutic interventions that play a role in recovery of function.
    4. Discuss the relationship of the neuropsychologist’s work in assessment and therapy to the work you hope to do as a professional.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Structure and function of the nervous system
    2. Scope and focus of neuropsychology
    3. Methods for studying the damaged nervous system, imaging the brain, and assessing laterality
    4. Cortical and subcortical motor disorders
    5. Perceptual deficits: the visual system
    6. Memory disorders: amnesias, dementias
    7. Language disorders: aphasia, alexia, agraphia
    8. Emotional disorders: lack of affect, Kluver‐Bucy syndrome, mood disorders
    9. Disorders of personal and extrapersonal space
    10. Disorders of attention and consciousness
    11. Developmental disorders
    12. Types and consequences of brain damage
    13. Neurological and psychiatric diseases
    14. Neuropsychological assessment and therapeutic intervention
    15. The neuropsychologist on the treatment team

    Primary Faculty
    Wakevainen, Edythe
    Secondary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2800 - Abnormal Psychology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Abnormal Psychology is designed to give the student an in-depth understanding of mental illness and the forces that contribute to the development of psychopathology. PSYC-2800 will include the study of various psychological disorders found in our society; and it will address and examine probable causes. Current treatment strategies will also be discussed.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand the history of mental illness.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the insane asylums.
    2. Explain the reason for creating asylums.
    3. Explain the “moral treatment” movement.
    4. Explain various historical treatment practices used on those with mental illness.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify common psychological disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Name the common depressive, bipolar disorders, PTSD/OCD, and anxiety disorders.
    2. Name the common eating disorders, dissociative, and personality disorders.
    3. Name the common psychotic disorders, somatic disorders, and substance use disorders.
    4. Name the common childhood disorders and neurocognitive disorders.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name the symptoms of common psychological disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in depressive, bipolar disorders, PTSD/OCD, and anxiety disorders.
    2. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in eating disorders, dissociative, and personality disorders.
    3. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in psychotic disorders, somatic disorders, and substance use disorders.
    4. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in childhood and neurocognitive disorders.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify current treatment methods for common psychological disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. List current treatment strategies for the depressive, bipolar disorders, PTSD/OCD, and anxiety disorders.
    2. List current treatment strategies for the eating disorders, dissociative, and personality disorders.
    3. List current treatment strategies for the psychotic disorders, somatic disorders, and substance use disorders.
    4. List current treatment strategies for the neurocognitive disorders.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Historical Foundation
      1. Historical Conceptions of Abnormal Behavior
        1. The Supernatural Tradition
        2. The Biological Tradition
        3. The Psychological Tradition
    2. Integrative Perspectives
      1. Genetic Contributions to Psychopathology
      2. Neuroscience and Its Contributions to Psychopathology
      3. Behavioral and Cognitive Science
      4. Emotions
      5. Cultural, Social, and Interpersonal Factors
    3. Clinical Assessment, Diagnosis, and Treatment
      1. Assessing Psychological Disorders
      2. Classifying Psychological Disorders and Understanding Diagnoses
      3. Treating Psychological Disorders
        1. Medical Treatments
        2. Psychosocial Treatments
        3. Combined Treatments
        4. Preventing Relapse
    4. Research Methods
      1. Studying Individual Cases
      2. Research Via Correlation
      3. Research Via Experiment
      4. Studying Genetics
      5. Studying Behavior Over Time
      6. Studying Behavior Across Cultures
      7. Research Ethics
    5. Anxiety Disorders
      1. Phobias
      2. Generalized Anxiety Disorder
      3. Social Anxiety Disorder
      4. Panic Disorder
      5. Agoraphobia
    6. Dissociative and Somatic Disorder, Others
      1. Dissociative Disorders
        1. Depersonalization Disorder
        2. Dissociative Amnesia
        3. Dissociative Identity Disorder
      2. Somatic Disorders
        1. Illness Anxiety Disorder
        2. Somatic Symptom Disorder
        3. Conversion Disorder
        4. Pain Disorder
      3. Others
        1. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
        2. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder
        3. Hoarding Disorder
        4. Body Dismorphic Disoder
    7. Depressive Disorders
      1. Depressive Disorders
      2. Bipolar Disorders
      3. Comorbidity With Anxiety
      4. Suicide
    8. Eating Disorders
      1. Bulimia Nervosa
      2. Anorexia Nervosa
      3. Binge‐Eating Disorder
      4. Other Eating Disorders
    9. Sleep Disorders
      1. Dyssomnias
        1. Insomnia
        2. Hypersomnia
        3. Narcolepsy
        4. Sleep Apnea
      2. Parasomnias
    10. Physical Disorders
      1. Immune System and Physical Disorders
        1. AIDS
        2. Cancer
      2. Chronic Pain
    11. Sexual and Gender Identity Disorders
      1. Gender Dysphoria
      2. Sexual Dysfunctions
      3. Paraphilias
        1. Fetishism
        2. Voyeurism, Exhibitionism, Frotteurism
        3. Sexual Masochism
        4. Sexual Sadism
        5. Pedophilia
    12. Substance‐Related Disorders
      1. Depressants
        1. Alcohol
        2. Sedatives
      2. Stimulants
        1. Amphetamines
        2. Cocaine
        3. Nicotine
        4. Caffeine
      3. Opioids
      4. Hallucinogens
        1. Marijuana
        2. LSD and Others
    13. Personality Disorders
      1. Cluster A
        1. Paranoid Personality Disorder
        2. Schizoid Personality Disorder
        3. Schizotypal Personality Disorder
      2. Cluster B
        1. Antisocial Personality Disorder
        2. Borderline Personality Disorder
        3. Histrionic Personality Disorder
        4. Narcissistic Personality Disorder
      3. Cluster C
        1. Avoidant Personality Disorder
        2. Dependent Personality Disorder
        3. Obsessive‐Compulsive Personality Disorder
      4. Personality Disorders Under Study
    14. Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
      1. Schizophrenia
      2. Other Psychotic Disorders
      3. Causes
    15. Disorders of Childhood
      1. Pervasive Developmental Disorders
        1. Autistic Spectrum Disorder
        2. Elimination Disorders
      2. Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
      3. Learning Disorders
      4. Intellectual Disability Disorder
    16. Neurocognitive Disorders
      1. Delirium
      2. Dementia
      3. Amnesic Disorder
    17. Mental Health Services
      1. Legal Issues
      2. Ethical Issues
      3. Criminal Commitment
      4. Rights of those with Mental Illness

    Primary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Secondary Faculty
    Van Wormer, Sara
    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2850 - Forensic Psychology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course will explore the application of psychological research and practice in relation to the criminal justice and legal systems. Topics include antisocial personality, mental illness and crime, substance abuse and crime, victimology, types of offenders, sexual crimes, white-collar crime, eye-witness testimony, insanity defense and competency to stand trial, capital murder and the death penalty, jury selection, sentencing and police interrogation. The varying ways in which the criminal justice system processes, treats, and interacts with the different types of offenders will also be discussed.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: PSYC-1010


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the psychological aspects of crime.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate an understanding of psychological principles as they relate to the legal system.
    2. Evaluate the various roles that psychologists play in the criminal justice system.
    3. Explore the applications of psychology to various criminal justice and correctional issues.
    4. Identify the various types of crimes most commonly related to mental health issues.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the legal aspects of crime.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast the various types of crimes and their impact on society.
    2. Analyze important case law that has shaped the relationship between psychology and the legal system.
    3. Evaluate how the courts and the legal system influence the practice of psychology at both the individual and systemic level.
    4. Evaluate how the field of psychology influences the legal field at both the individual and public policy level.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the various components of the legal system.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate the investigation process, interrogation process, Miranda rights, and confessions.
    2. Analyze the effectiveness of punishment and rehabilitation models.
    3. Explore the treatment and needs of juvenile offenders.
    4. Describe the process of evaluating competency and insanity.
    5. Evaluate the options of those deemed incompetent or criminally insane.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. What Is Forensic Psychology?
      1. The origin of forensic psychology
      2. Major Areas of Forensic Psychology
      3. Structure of the legal system
      4. The Law and Psychology
      5. Conflict between psychology and law
      6. Careers in forensic psychology
    2. Assessment, Treatment, and Consultation in Forensic Psychology
      1. Forensic assessment method and procedures
      2. Treatment in Forensic settings
      3. Success of offender programs
      4. Substance abuse treatment and assessment
    3. Expert Testimony and the Role of an Expert
      1. History of the Expert Witness
      2. Admissibility of Expert Testimony
      3. Challenges to Expert Testimony
      4. Criticisms of Expert Testimony
    4. Psychopathy
      1. The Nature of the Psychopath
      2. General violence and criminal behavior
      3. Sexual violence
      4. Domestic violence
      5. Special Groups (women, children adolescents, intellectually disabled)
      6. Ethnic and cultural considerations
      7. Legal and Ethical Issues Involving Psychopathy
    5. Violence Risk Assessment
      1. What is a Risk Assessment
      2. Clinical, Actuarial, and Structured Risk Assessments
      3. Risk and Protective Factors
      4. Difficulties in risk assessment
    6. Sexual Offenders
      1. What Is a Sexual Offender?
      2. Risk assessment and recidivism
      3. Treatment and Management of Sexual Offenders
      4. Juvenile sexual offenders
      5. Female sexual offenders
      6. Sexual Offender laws, registration and residency issues
    7. Criminal and Civil Competence
      1. Competency to Stand Trial
      2. Competency evaluations
      3. Restoration of Competency
      4. Other Criminal Competencies 184
    8. Insanity, Criminal Responsibility, and Diminished Capacity
      1. Insanity Defense‐historical and present views
      2. Historical cases related to insanity laws
      3. Guilty but mentally ill
      4. Evaluations of Insanity
      5. Criminal Responsibility and Diminished Capacity
    9. Domestic Violence
      1. Defining and Identifying the Prevalence of Domestic Violence
      2. Consequences of domestic violence
      3. Risk Factors and Risk Assessment in Domestic Violence
      4. Domestic Violence Treatment
    10. Juvenile Delinquency and Juvenile Justice
      1. History of the Juvenile Court
      2. Juvenile Delinquency and Juvenile Offenses
      3. Risk factors for juvenile delinquency
      4. Juveniles charged as adults
      5. Treatment for juvenile offenders
    11. Child Custody
      1. Legal history and standards
      2. Child custody laws
      3. Child custody evaluations
      4. Effects of custody and divorce on children
      5. Child Abuse
    12. Court proceedings
      1. Jury selection
      2. Eye witness testimony
      3. Accuracy of memory
      4. Child witnesses
      5. Sentencing
      6. Death penalty

    Primary Faculty
    Wickline, Karen
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Reading

  
  • READ 0960 - Reading Strategies


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly READ-0950) READ-0960 provides students with additional preparation and a refresher in fundamental reading skills and strategies. This course is designed to improve vocabulary, reading comprehension, and study skills for greater success in courses throughout college.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Placement


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply varied and appropriate active reading strategies in each phase of the reading process to understand what is read.

    Objectives:

    1. Examine the roles prior knowledge and personal experience play in helping readers make connections and understand topics.
    2. Identify and selectively apply a variety of before reading strategies to establish ones purpose and approach for reading a range of texts.
      1. Previewing
        1. Vocabulary
        2. Text Features
        3. Headings/Subheadings
        4. Book Resources
        5. Skimming/Scanning
      2. Textbook Inventory
    3. Develop and apply strategies for comprehending text during reading to construct meaning, draw conclusions, evaluate understanding, and monitor comprehension.
      1. Determine Main Ideas
      2. Generate Questions
      3. Draw Conclusions
      4. Annotate
      5. Infer
      6. Visualize
    4. Reflect on and respond to text after reading to synthesize understanding by sharing, acknowledging, and building on the ideas of others.
      1. Discussion Groups (small, whole, partners)
      2. Response Journals
      3. Study Guides
      4. Literacy (B)logs

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply knowledge of language and word systems to construct meaning and comprehend more fully when reading.

    Objectives:

    1. Use context (e.g., the overall meaning of a sentence, paragraph, or text; a word’s position or function in a sentence) as a clue to the meaning of a word or phrase.
    2. Recognize and use roots, affixes, and word origins to understand technical, scientific, or mathematic language.
    3. Identify and correctly use patterns of word changes that indicate different meanings or parts of speech (e.g., conceive, conception, conceivable).
    4. Consult general and specialized reference materials both print and digital, to find the pronunciation of a word, determine or clarify its precise meaning, part of speech, etymology, or standard usage.
    5. Study and memorize the meanings of words and phrases in alternative ways by creating graphic representations or restating in own words.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to engage in self-assessment as a reader by setting personal learning goals and taking responsibility for one’s academic growth.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate reading interests, strengths, and areas of improvement and apply assessment results to improve reading ability over time.
    2. Apply learning strategies and study skills to enhance learning.
      1. Annotating
      2. Note-Taking
        1. Highlighting

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Literacy Development
      1. Assessment and Evaluation
        1. Pre-Assessment: Nelson-Denny
        2. Other assessments
          1. Reading Interest Survey (self-assessment)
          2. Reading Goals (self-assessment)
          3. Writing Sample
          4. Academic Word List
      2. Literacy Learning Strategies
        1. What is Annotating?
        2. Note-Taking Tips
          1. Appropriate Ways to Highlight
      3. Use of Technological Resources
        1. My Reading Lab
        2. Library/Internet Resources
    2. Active Reading
      1. Before Reading
        1. The Importance of Background Knowledge
          1. What Do I Already Know?
        2. Reading Textbooks vs. Fiction
        3. Previewing the Text
          1. Vocabulary
          2. Using Context Clues
          3. Word Parts & Origins
          4. Word Forms
          5. Word Study
            1. Using the Dictionary/Thesaurus
            2. Making Concept Cards
        4. Text Features
          1. Textbook Inventory
        5. Headings/Subheadings
        6. Chapter Titles
        7. Book Resources
          1. Glossary, Index, Appendix, etc.
        8. Skimming/Scanning
        9. Anticipation Guides
    3. During Reading
      1. Being an Active Reader
        1. Annotating
        2. Literacy (B)logs
        3. Vocabulary Analysis
          1. Using Context Clues
          2. Word Parts & Origins
          3. Word Study
          4. Using the Dictionary/Thesaurus
        4. Determining Main Ideas
        5. Generating Questions
        6. Drawing Conclusions/Summarizing
    4. After Reading
      1. Review, Reflect, Respond (ideas listed below)
        1. Discussion Groups
          1. Small-whole-partner
        2. Reading Blogs (sharing)
        3. Response Journals
        4. Study Guides
        5. Quick Writes
        6. Sketch to Stretch
        7. Study Guides
    5. Reading Selections
      1. Apply the Active Reading Process
        1. Nonfiction Reading (textbooks, articles, etc.)
        2. Fiction (novel)
    6. Post-Assessment
      1. Administer Nelson-Denny
      2. Other assessments
        1. Reading Interest Survey
        2. Writing Sample
        3. Academic Word Lists

    Primary Faculty
    Mayernik, Heather
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • READ 1200 - Reading in the Disciplines


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly READ 1100)
    This course engages students in collaborative dialogue and the application of reading and writing strategies. This class will improve students’ comprehension of technical and discipline-specific text while developing the ability to read and think critically needed to succeed in college level coursework.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a concept map to demonstrate relationships between and among ideas: cause/effect, comparison/contrast, sequence.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret graphs and charts
    2. Look for patterns and trends
    3. Interpret patterns of organization within sentences and paragraphs and charts

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to test and verify hypotheses through the application of before, during and after reading/study strategies to develop comprehension.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply the Four Step Reading Process and record margin notes to annotate a text
    2. Actively create text to self, text to text, and text to world connections while reading
    3. Record predictions and questions
    4. Distinguish fact from opinion
    5. Draw inferences to identify the implied main idea
    6. Monitor comprehension by deploying fix-it strategies as needed. For example, rereading, citing evidence from the text to support reasoning

     
    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to reconstruct the rhetorical tools of an author or discipline specific text.

    Objectives:

    1. Use of connotative/denotative meaning, figurative language, and literal versus implied meaning and how they influence an interpretation of a text
    2. Evaluate an author’s: purpose, tone, claim, argument
    3. Probe and challenge underlying bias and assumptions
    4. Recognize pattern of organization within sentences and paragraphs of a text.
    5. Effectively paraphrase and summarize texts using journalistic style questions
    6. Identify discipline specific vocabulary and syntax

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course students will be able to evaluate multiple perspectives to find inter-textual links between related authors/topics.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate corroboration of sources
    2. Construct interpretations of a text by making judgments and connections with prior knowledge and experience
    3. Integrate primary and secondary sources using MLA and APA citation correctly
    4. Explore reactions and response to texts orally and in writing to reinforce the connection between reading and writing

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.

    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Four Part Reading Process
    2. Structure of Expository texts
    3. Patterns of Organization
    4. Examining the purpose and structure of an argument
    5. Interpretive Reading and Critical Thinking
    6. Effectively Retelling, paraphrasing, and summarizing
    7. Concepts Maps and Interpreting Graphs and Charts
    8. Using research techniques by citing information using MLA and APA format

    Primary Faculty
    Ferguson, Cheryl
    Secondary Faculty
    Mayernik, Heather
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Renewable Energy

  
  • RNEW 1000 - Introduction to Energy


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly RNEW-2911) RNEW-1000 explores the physical, environmental, political, and social impact of energy. Topics include energy conservation, electric and thermal generation, materials, fossil fuels, nuclear energy, and energy alternatives. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform basic equations for work, energy, and power.
    2. Recognize and demonstrate understanding of conservation of energy.
    3. Recognize and demonstrate knowledge of potential and kinetic energy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to differentiate between the various forms of energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will define and discuss electrical energy.
    2. Students will define and discuss chemical energy.
    3. Students will define and discuss nuclear energy.
    4. Students will define and discuss thermal energy.
    5. Students will define and discuss mechanical energy.
    6. Students will define and discuss radiant energy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the positive and negative consequences of energy and its alternatives as they apply to society, politics, and the environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify pollution from energy sources.
    2. Describe and demonstrate understanding of impact on climate and weather.
    3. Identify financial issues.
    4. Identify political views.
    5. Define energy storage options.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Topic

    1. Introduction to Energy
    2. Energy Consumption
    3. Forms of Energy
    4. Fossil Fuels Test #1
    5. Heat to Motive Power
    6. Oil and Gas
    7. Secondary Fuels
    8. Midterm Exam Test #2
    9. Engines: Diesel, Gas, Stirling
    10. Electricity
    11. Nuclear Power
    12. Future of Nuclear Energy Test #3
    13. Costing Energy
    14. Environmental Concerns
    15. Environmental Impact
    16. Review and Final Exam Test #4

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1010 - Renewable Energy Concepts


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    RNEW-1010 explores and investigates the sources, technologies, and applications of renewable energy. Topics include solar thermal and photovoltaic energy, wind energy, bioenergy, hydroelectricity, tidal and wave power, and geothermal resources. The focus is on technological principles, economic and environmental impact, integration, and policy. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define renewable energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Define direct and indirect energy usage
    2. Recognize and demonstrate knowledge of present day use of renewable energy
    3. Define and discuss future potential of renewable resources

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to differentiate between the various forms of renewable energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of solar thermal and photovoltaic energy.
    2. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of biomass energy.
    3. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of hydroelectricity.
    4. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of tidal and wave power,
    5. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of wind energy.
    6. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of geothermal energy.
    7. Students will define and discuss the nature, economics, benefits, drawbacks and potential of hydrogen fuel cells.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the positive and negative consequences involved in the integration of renewable energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe and demonstrate knowledge of current energy structure and distribution
    2. Describe and demonstrate knowledge of renewable resource availability
    3. Identify and discuss transmission and storage issues
    4. Define and discuss economic considerations
    5. Describe and discuss potential solutions

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Topic

    1. Introduction to Renewable Energy
    2. Solar Thermal Energy
    3. Solar Photovoltaic’s
    4. Review/Exam #1
    5. Bioenergy
    6. Hydroelectricity
    7. Tidal Power
    8. Review/Midterm Exam
    9. Wind Energy
    10. Wave Energy
    11. Geothermal Energy
    12. Review/Exam #3
    13. Hydrogen Fuel Cells
    14. Integration
    15. Case Studies
    16. Review and Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1020 - Introduction to Sustainability


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    RNEW-1020 provides an overview of the meaning, application, and impact that sustainable practices can have on “The Triple Bottom Line”: our economy, society, and environment. The focus will be to uncover the link that sustainable practices have on financial growth, developing a strong community, and ensuring protection of our environment. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define sustainability.

    Objectives:

    1. Define and discuss the benefits in utilizing sustainable practices
    2. Define and discuss using sustainability as a strategy
    3. Define and discuss the challenges associated with sustainable systems

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the global impact of sustainability.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will define and discuss the benefits and challenges surrounding population and urbanization.
    2. Students will define and discuss the benefits and challenges surrounding natural resources.
    3. Students will define and discuss the benefits and challenges surrounding international law and financing.
    4. Students will define and discuss the benefits and challenges surrounding social and cultural policies

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the process necessary to incorporate sustainability into corporate culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe corporate engagement
    2. Identify and discuss economic impacts
    3. Describe and discuss risk assessment
    4. Describe and discuss verification

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction/Sustainability Defined
    2. Concept of Sustainable Development
    3. Globalization
    4. Review/Exam #1
    5. Social Capital/Sustainable Development Indicators
    6. Environmental Assessment and Impact
    7. Politics and Governance
    8. Review/Midterm Exam
    9. Economics of Sustainability
    10. Social Policies
    11. Tools for Sustainability: Case Studies
    12. Review/Exam #3
    13. Legislation, International Law
    14. International Cooperation
    15. Leading the Process - Challenges for Sustainability
    16. Review and Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1100 - Principles of Wind Energy


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly RNEW-2912) RNEW-1100 analyzes and evaluates wind energy. Topics include the source of wind, history and types of wind turbines, how wind turbines work, structure of a turbine system, issues involved in establishing a system including the challenges, advantages, and available resources. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the structure of a wind turbine.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic components of a turbine.
    2. Define the various types of windmills.
    3. Define and discuss historical evolution of the windmill.
    4. Define the concept of an airfoil.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define the source of the wind.

    Objectives:

    1. Sun-earth energy balance.
    2. Heating of the earth surface.
    3. Large scale weather patterns.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the positive and negative consequences of wind energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate understanding of transformation of energy.
    2. Demonstrate understanding of energy distribution.
    3. Identify financial issues.
    4. Identify political views.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competenty.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Source of Wind
    2. History of Windmills, Types of Windmills
    3. Structure of a Wind Turbine
    4. How Wind Turbines Work Test #1
    5. Harnessing the Wind
    6. Power Extracted from Wind
    7. Lift and the Importance of Airfoils
    8. Review and Midterm Exam Test #2
    9. Windmill Installation
    10. Efficiency and Reliability
    11. Financial Implications
    12. Social Issues Test #3
    13. Environmental Issues
    14. Government Support and Political Issues
    15. Recent Developments
    16. Review and Final Exam Test #4

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1110 - Wind Energy Lab


    Credit Hours: 1.00
    (1 contact hr)
    RNEW-1110 is a laboratory course that introduces students to the practical application of wind energy. A variety of hands-on activities are included. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss the design of a residential wind energy system.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the major components of a wind turbine electrical generation system.
    2. Recognize and demonstrate understanding of applicable wind turbine regulations and legislation.
    3. Correlate wind power-to-turbine speed-to power generation of a wind system.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss the installation of a residential wind energy system.

    Objectives:

    1. Connect the wind turbine to common protective/control devices.
    2. Test basic operation and direct output of the wind turbine.
    3. Adjust the output of the wind turbine.
    4. Supply DC & AC load with the wind turbine.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss an off-grid residential wind energy system.

    Objectives:

    1. Battery configurations.
    2. Battery charge/discharge rates.
    3. Implementation of excess capacity management/auxiliary loads.
    4. System efficiency (charge/discharge rates vs. inverter output).

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lab 1 - Introduction to Wind Turbines

    Lab 2 - Performance Testing

    Lab 3 - Connecting Wind Turbine to Storage System

    Lab 4 - External Voltage Regulator/Load Diverter Operation


    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1200 - Principles of Solar Energy


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly RNEW-2913) RNEW-1200 analyzes and evaluates solar energy systems. Topics include the nature of sunlight, history of solar generated electricity, types and structure of solar modules, issues involved in establishing a solar energy system including the challenges, advantages, and available resources. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify current and past solar cell structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic components, construction, and materials of a solar module.
    2. Define the various types of solar arrays.
    3. Define and discuss historical evolution of solar energy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define the operations of a solar module.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the basic concept of photon energy.
    2. Define the function of the sun and ultraviolet light in solar energy.
    3. Define the factors which influence solar cell efficiency.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the positive and negative consequences of solar energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate understanding of transformation of energy.
    2. Demonstrate understanding of energy distribution.
    3. Identify financial issues.
    4. Identify political views.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Source of Wind
    2. History of Solar Generated Electricity
    3. Component Identification of Solar Cells
    4. Operation of Solar Cells Test #1
    5. Solar Cell Materials
    6. Module Construction Techniques
    7. Array Sizing and Calculating Load
    8. Review and Midterm Exam Test #2
    9. Solar Cell Installation
    10. Solar Cell Efficiency
    11. Solar Power Reliability
    12. Solar Economics and Cost Analysis Test #3
    13. Thermal Collectors
    14. Social and Environmental Issues
    15. Government Support and Political Issues, Recent Developments
    16. Review and Final Exam Test #4

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1210 - Solar Energy Lab


    Credit Hours: 1.00
    (1 contact hr)
    RNEW-1210 is a laboratory course that introduces students to the practical application of solar energy. A variety of hands-on activities are included. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss the design of solar photovoltaic energy system.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the major components of a photovoltaic generation system.
    2. Recognize and demonstrate understanding of applicable solar power regulations and legislation.
    3. Determine the PV panel specifications and configurations to meet the project requirements.
    4. Identify and select system components based on project requirements.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss the installation of a solar photovoltaic energy system.

    Objectives:

    1. Connect the photovoltaic panel to common protective/control devices.
    2. Configure and adjust panels to achieve necessary voltage/current/power requirements.
    3. Correlate light intensity-to-power generation.
    4. Supply DC & AC load with the array system.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss an off-grid residential photovoltaic energy system.

    Objectives:

    1. Battery configurations.
    2. Battery charge/discharge rates.
    3. Implementation of excess capacity management/auxiliary loads.
    4. System efficiency (charge/discharge rates vs. inverter output).

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lab 1 - Introduction to PV Panels

    Lab 2 - Testing Under Load & Effects of Lighting Angle

    Lab 3 - Preparing and Connecting Array to Storage System

    Lab 4 - External Voltage Regulator/Load Diverter Operation & Generating AC Output


    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1300 - Principles of Biomass Technology


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    RNEW-1300 analyzes and evaluates biomass technologies and bioenergy systems. Topics include the basic concepts of biomass, land use issues, historical role of biomass, woody and non-woody biomass and secondary fuels. This course also discusses issues involved in biomass including the challenges, advantages, and available resources. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the different biomass technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic biomass processing techniques.
    2. Define and discuss cofiring.
    3. Define and discuss pyrolysis.
    4. Define and discuss gasification methods.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and describe the classifications of biomass technology.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify traditional versus modern biomass applications
    2. Define woody biomass.
    3. Define agro biomass.
    4. Define urban waste-based biomass.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the positive and negative consequences of biomass technology.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate understanding of difficulties with data/classification of bioenergy.
    2. Demonstrate understanding of technology barriers.
    3. Identify land management and usage issues.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Introduction to Biomass/Bioenergy
    2. Historical and Current Role of Biomass Technologies
    3. Biomass Classification
    4. Biomass Assessment Test #1
    5. Accessibility and Energy Value
    6. Woody Biomass Supply
    7. Non-woody Biomass Supply
    8. Review and Midterm Exam Test #2
    9. Secondary Fuels/Biofuels
    10. Herbaceous Crops
    11. Animal, Tertiary, Pellets, Briqueties
    12. Derivative Sources Test #3
    13. Biomass Consumption
    14. Land Management Considerations
    15. Environmental Impact
    16. Review and Final Exam Test #4

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1310 - Biomass Technology Lab


    Credit Hours: 1.00
    (1 contact hr)
    RNEW-1110 is a laboratory course that introduces students to the practical application of biomass energy. A variety of hands-on activities are included. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss steps in the fermentation process.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the major components for cornmeal and sugar feedstock.
    2. Utilize enzymes to break starches into sugar.
    3. Utilize yeast to ferment water and grain into a mash.
    4. Utilize yeast to ferment water and sugar into a wash.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss the process of converting cooking oil into biodiesel fuel.

    Objectives:

    1. Combine cooking oil, methanol and lye to produce biodiesel fuel.
    2. Separate glycerin from the product.
    3. Wash and test the biodiesel fuel.
    4. Dry the biodiesel fuel.
    5. Reclaim methanol from the system

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define and discuss the ethanol distillation process.

    Objectives:

    1. Convert sugar wash and corn mash into ethanol fuel.
    2. Test the ethanol fuel quality.
    3. Compare quality of fuels derived from starch and sugar-based sources.
    4. Operate a small engine using ethanol as the major fuel component.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lab 1 - Introduction to Ethanol - Fermentation

    Lab 2 - Introduction to Biodiesel Fuel

    Lab 3 - Ethanol Distillation

    Lab 4 - Using Biofuels in Engines


    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1400 - Principles of Geothermal Energy


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    RNEW-1400 analyzes and evaluates geothermal energy systems. Topics include the basic concepts of geothermal energy, plate tectonics, heat flow, and types of geothermal systems. This course also discusses issues involved in geothermal systems including the challenges, advantages, and available resources. Hands-on activities are included. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify different geothermal structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic definitions and classifications of geothermal energy.
    2. Define the various types of geothermal systems.
    3. Define and discuss various electricity generation methods.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to define the earth’s role in geothermal systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Define and discuss plate tectonics, ocean ridges and trenches, and geothermal fields.
    2. Define and discuss the thermal structure of the earth.
    3. Define the various exploration techniques and resources.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the positive and negative consequences of geothermal energy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate understanding of technology barriers.
    2. Identify financial issues.
    3. Identify resource and drilling technology issues.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Introduction to Geothermal Energy
    2. Resource Utilization
    3. Earth’s Structure
    4. Heat Flow Test #1
    5. Plate Tectonics
    6. Geothermal Systems
    7. Resource Availability, Needs
    8. Review and Midterm Exam Test #2
    9. How Geothermal Systems Work
    10. Geological Considerations
    11. Hydrological Considerations
    12. Drilling Technology Test #3
    13. Efficiency and Reliability
    14. System Installation
    15. Environmental Issues
    16. Review and Final Exam Test #4

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1500 - Principles of Hydrogen Fuel Cell Technology


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    RNEW-1500 analyzes and evaluates hydrogen fuel cell technology. Topics include hydrogen safety, storage, production, codes, regulations, and standards associated with hydrogen. This course also discusses the history of fuel cells, current applications, future use, fuel cell structures, operations, and classifications. Hands-on activities are included. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to describe hydrogen safety, storage, and production.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the properties of hydrogen.
    2. Describe the safety precautions in handling hydrogen.
    3. Describe the different ways to produce hydrogen.
    4. List the different types of hydrogen storage.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify codes, regulations, and standards associated with hydrogen.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast hydrogen and conventional fuels.
    2. Describe the state codes, standards, and regulations.
    3. Describe the national codes, standards, and regulations.
    4. Describe the international codes, standards, and regulations.
    5. Describe codes, standards, and regulations in progress.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to explain the operation of a fuel cell.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the importance of fuel cell technology.
    2. Define terms and components related to fuel cells.
    3. Explain fuel cell operation.
    4. Describe electrical components and ratings for fuel cells.
    5. Explain the past, present, and future state of fuel cells.
    6. Describe state and national government initiatives for fuel cells.
    7. Compare and contrast the different types of fuel cells.
    8. List examples of fuel cell applications.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Hydrogen safety
    2. Hydrogen production
    3. Hydrogen storage Test #1
    4. Hydrogen comparison to conventional fuels
    5. Hydrogen state codes, standards, and regulations
    6. Hydrogen national codes, standards, and regulations
    7. Hydrogen international codes, standards, and regulations
    8. Review and Midterm Test #2
    9. Fuel cell relevance and definition
    10. Fuel cell operation
    11. Electrical components and ratings for fuel cells
    12. History of fuel cells Test #3
    13. State and national government initiatives
    14. Fuel cell types
    15. Fuel cell applications
    16. Review & Final Exam Test #4

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RNEW 1800 - Energy Management Fundamentals


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (6 Contact Hrs)
    RNEW-1800 explores the field of energy management. Topics include energy analysis, benchmarking, evaluation of systems, auditing basics, survey instrumentation, system performance, efficiency, and optimization. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to describe the principles of effective energy management.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe energy policy and planning.
    2. Perform benchmarking and baselining techniques.
    3. Define and discuss system efficiency, maintenance, and controls.
    4. Define and discuss building envelopes.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to differentiate between and describe the various energy systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will define and discuss the impact of boilers and fired systems on energy efficiency.
    2. Students will define and discuss the impact of steam and condensate systems on energy efficiency.
    3. Students will define and discuss the impact of lighting/electric on energy efficiency.
    4. Students will define and discuss the impact of natural gas on energy efficiency.
    5. Students will define and discuss the impact of HVAC on energy efficiency.
    6. Students will define and discuss the impact of construction on energy efficiency.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to perform a basic energy analysis.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will define and discuss identification and evaluation of all energy systems.
    2. Students will define and discuss analyze impact of improvements on systems.
    3. Students will define and discuss perform basic economic analysis and generate an energy report.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Overview/Value of Energy Management
    2. Energy Planning, Codes, Standards
    3. Energy Auditing/Energy Bills
    4. Review/Exam #1
    5. Economic Analysis
    6. Life Cycle Costing
    7. Process Energy Management and Reporting
    8. Review/Midterm Exam
    9. Efficiency of Systems
    10. Lighting/HVAC
    11. Boilers and Steam Distribution Systems
    12. Review/Exam #3
    13. Management Control Systems
    14. Maintenance, Energy Security and Reliability
    15. Energy Project Presentations
    16. Review and Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Respiratory Therapy

  
  • RSPT 1050 - Clinical Cardiorespiratory Physiologic Anatomy


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    RSPT-1050 teaches respiratory and cardiac anatomy and physiology with a focus on clinical application. Topics include anatomy and physiology, ventilation, pulmonary function measurements, gas diffusion, oxygen and carbon dioxide equilibration and transport, acid-base regulation and ventilation/perfusion relationships. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and BIOL-2710 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and BIOL-2730 or BIOL-2400 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-1060
    Corequisite: RSPT-1085


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the anatomy of the cardiopulmonary system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a model of the upper or lower airway, identify the key structures.
    2. Define the directional terms and abdominal quadrants and regions and use these terms to describe anatomical locations.
    3. Describe the major structures and functions of the upper and lower airways.
    4. Name the lobes and segments of the lungs.
    5. Identify the anatomic landmarks of the thorax.
    6. List the primary and accessory muscles of inspiration and expiration.
    7. Diagram the heart indicating the chambers, blood vessels that enter and leave the heart, cardiac valves, layers of heart muscle, pericardium and blood supply to the myocardial tissues.
    8. Diagram the electrical conduction system of the heart and state the normal rate associated with each intrinsic pacemaker.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how spontaneous ventilation occurs.

    Objectives:

    1. Diagram the lungs and thorax detailing the lung pressures and pressure gradients.
    2. Describe how the movement of the diaphragm affects lung pressures.
    3. Discuss the effects of surface tension on lung function.
    4. Given appropriate data, define compliance and resistance and calculate each.
    5. Define and describe the importance of deadspace ventilation.
    6. Given a graph of a ventilatory pattern, identify the ventilation pattern present.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will list the steps of how a gas moves from the atmosphere to the bloodstream, and ultimately to the tissues.

    Objectives:

    1. List the major gases present in the atmosphere and demonstrate how to determine the partial pressure of each gas and the total gas present.
    2. Given the appropriate information, calculate the PAO2.
    3. Diagram the pathway of gas diffusion across the alveolar capillary (AC) membrane and describe how each can affect gas diffusion.
    4. Explain how the DLCO test is performed to determine diffusion defects in the lung.
    5. Differentiate between hypoxia and hypoxemia and state how each are determined.
    6. List the indices that are used to assess oxygenation and describe how each affect the total amount of oxygen carried in the blood.
    7. Given appropriate known values, calculate the oxygen content, oxygen content difference, and oxygen delivery.
    8. List the factors that shift the oxyhemoglobin curve to the right and to the left.
    9. State the causes of hypoxemia and how each is treated.
    10. List the types of hypoxia and give an example of each.
    11. Explain how the V/Q ratio is derived and state the normal value.
    12. Given appropriate data, identify the types of V/Q ratios, and state a condition associated with this ratio.
    13. Given appropriate data, calculate the V/Q and deadspace fraction.
    14. List the types of deadspace and state how each are calculated.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how carbon dioxide is removed from the body and interpret laboratory values associated with blood-gas and acid-base values.

    Objectives:

    1. List the three ways CO2 is transported in the plasma and the three ways it is transported in the RBC.
    2. Given the appropriate data, calculate the carbon dioxide content and state the normal values for each parameter.
    3. Describe the relationship between PaCO2, H ions, and pH.
    4. Describe the ratio of HCO3ions to H2CO3 (PaCO2).
    5. Given appropriate acid-base data, describe the acid-base status including level of compensation, oxygenation status, and state a possible cause of for the disorder.
    6. Differentiate between acute and chronic respiratory/ventilatory failure and identify acid-base disturbances that requires mechanical ventilation.
    7. Given an ABG, identify an acute exacerbation of COPD.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how ventilation is regulated.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function of the respiratory centers in the medulla oblongata, apneustic, and pneumotaxic centers.
    2. Describe the function of the central and peripheral chemoreceptors.
    3. List and describe the various reflexes associated with ventilation.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the function of the cardiovascular system.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe the function of the various components of blood.
    2. Given appropriate data, calculate cardiac output, stroke volume, blood pressure, and vascular resistance and identify if each is out of range.
    3. List the factors that regulate stroke volume.
    4. Explain how the baroreceptors function to affect blood pressure.
    5. Describe the function of a pulmonary artery catheter and state how pulmonary capillary wedge pressure can be used to determine the type of heart failure present.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how pulmonary function is assessed and used in the diagnosis of pulmonary disease.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe the technique for determining the volumes and capacities of the lung and state their normal values.
    2. Using graph paper, diagram and calculate the key volumes and flowrates associated with a pulmonary function study.
    3. Given pulmonary function data, identify the process as obstructive, restrictive, mixed, or normal.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Anatomy Review
      1. Directional Terms
      2. Planes of the Body
    2. Anatomy of the Respiratory System
      1. Tissue Epithelium
      2. Upper Airway
      3. Lower Airway
      4. Site of Gas Exchange
      5. Pulmonary Vascular System
      6. Neural Control
      7. Lungs
      8. Mediastinum
      9. Thorax
      10. Muscles of Ventilation
    3. Ventilation
      1. Pressure Differences
      2. Mechanics of Ventilation
      3. Static Characteristics of the Lung
        1. Elastic
        2. Surface Tension
      4. Dynamic Characteristics of the Lung
      5. Ventilatory Patterns
    4. Diffusion
      1. Dalton’s Law
      2. AlveolarCapillary structure
      3. Alveolar Gas Equation
      4. Gas Diffusion across the AC membrane
    5. Pulmonary Function
      1. Lung Volumes
      2. Lung Capacities
      3. Pulmonary Function Studies
    6. Circulatory System
      1. Blood Composition
      2. Heart Anatomy
      3. Systemic and Pulmonary Vascular Resistance
      4. Conduction System
      5. Electrocardiography
      6. Blood Pressure
      7. Heart Failure
      8. Baroreceptors
      9. Blood Volume
    7. Oxygen Transport
      1. Oxygen Transport
      2. Oxygen Dissociation Curve
      3. Tissue Hypoxia
      4. Cyanosis
      5. Polycythemia
      6. Pulse Oximetry
    8. Carbon Dioxide Transport
      1. Carbon Dioxide Transport
      2. Carbon Dioxide Elimination
      3. Carbon Dioxide Dissociation Curve
      4. Acid-Base Balance
      5. Base Excess/Deficit
    9. Ventilation Perfusion Relationships
    10. Control of Breathing

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1060 - Physiochemical Basis of Respiratory Therapy


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    RSPT-1060 teaches basic mathematics, physics and chemistry as it applies to respiratory therapy. Topics include measurement systems, mechanics, energy and matter, properties of fluids, gas laws, gas movement, solutions and drug calculations, elements and compounds, acid-base and fluid balance, and nutrition and metabolism. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and BIOL-2710 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and BIOL-2730 or BIOL-2400 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-1050
    Corequisite: RSPT-1085


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the use of basic math principles and concepts to solve problems in Respiratory Care.

    Objectives:

    1. Solve problems involving positive and negative numbers.
    2. Follow the rounding rules.
    3. Solve problems involving decimals.
    4. Solve problems involving order of operation.
    5. Solve problems involving fractions.
    6. Solve problems involving ratios and proportions.
    7. Set up a formula and convert between the measurement systems and within the metric system.
    8. Rearrange formulas.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply the laws of gas behavior to equipment and clinical situations in Respiratory Care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate an understanding of the divisions of matter.
    2. Demonstrate an understanding of basic inorganic chemistry.
    3. Explain and apply Dalton’s Law to respiratory therapy.
    4. Define the following laws, explain the relationship between volume, pressure, mass, and temperature, and use the mathematical formula to solve for an unknown.
      1. Boyle’s Law
      2. Charles’s Law
      3. Gay Lussac’s Law
      4. Combined gas law
      5. Universal (Ideal) Gas Law
    5. Explain the relationship between temperature, pressure, and volume and convert between the temperature scales.
    6. Explain the relationship between the things that affect humidity and describe the different forms of humidity.
    7. Explain how properties of gases may change under extreme temperatures and pressures.
    8. Explain what a critical point is and how it is used in gas therapy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to explain how changes in surface tension, compliance and resistance will affect gas flow in the respiratory system.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the processes of internal and external respiration.
    2. Use following laws to explain the factors that affect diffusion of a gas into a liquid, dissolving of a gas in a liquid and gas movement into solution.
      1. Graham’s Law
      2. Henry’s Law
      3. Fick’s Law
    3. Explain the relationship between ventilation and perfusion.
    4. Calculate and apply clinically the respiratory quotient, PAO2, AaDO2, a/A ratio and PaO2/FIO2, oxygen delivery to the tissues, utilization and extraction using cardiac output and oxygen content.
    5. Define and list the causes of hypoxemia and hypoxia.
    6. Draw and explain the equation of motion.
    7. Explain the relationship between pressure, surface tension, surfactant and radius if one if the variables is held constant.
    8. Define, compare, list the formulas for, the normal values for and apply clinically the following:
      1. Lung compliance
      2. Thoracic compliance
      3. Total compliance
      4. Static compliance
      5. Dynamic compliance
      6. Airway resistance
    9. Explain the significance Poiseuille’s law and the Reynolds number as they relate to frictional resistance and ventilation.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the processes of internal and external respiration, oxygenation, and acid-base balance in the human body.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the relationship between matter, mixtures and solutions.
    2. Explain the role of the following pressures and their effects on the blood and tracheobronchial tree:
      1. Osmotic
      2. Oncotic
      3. Tonicity
    3. Perform drug calculations.
      1. Given %weight/volume solutions (%)
      2. Given ratio solutions (1:100)
      3. Using the Universal Formula for solving w/v solutions
      4. Drug dilution problems
      5. Given an adult dose of medication, use an infant’s age in months, child’s age in years, weight or body surface area to determine the correct dosage.
    4. Draw and label the pH scale and explain how pH is regulated.
    5. Differentiate between an acid, base and salt.
    6. Given an ABG, indicate the primary Acid-Base disturbance, oxygenation abnormality, possible causes, symptoms, compensation and treatments:
      1. Respiratory acidosis and alkalosis
      2. Metabolic acidosis and alkalosis
    7. Briefly define the following ventilatory acid-base abnormalities and give a blood gas example of each:
      1. Acute alveolar hyperventilation with hypoxemia (respiratory alkalosis or respiratory insufficiency)
      2. Acute ventilatory failure with hypoxemia (uncompensated respiratory acidosis)
      3. Chronic ventilatory failure with hypoxemia (compensated respiratory acidosis)
      4. Acute alveolar hyperventilation superimposed on chronic ventilatory failure
      5. Acute ventilatory failure superimposed on chronic ventilatory failure
    8. Explain the role of electrolytes in acid base balance and identify the macronutrients and micronutrients found in the human body.
    9. Explain the role of body fluid balance, how body fluid is controlled, what causes disorders in body fluids and what symptoms can be caused by imbalance in body fluid volume.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Mathematics
      1. Positive and Negative Numbers and rounding
      2. Decimals and order of operation
      3. Proportions, ratios, and fractions
      4. Measurement systems and scientific notation
      5. Conversion and canceling
      6. Rearranging
    2. Basic Chemistry
      1. Atoms and molecules and elements and compounds
      2. Periodic table
      3. Bonding and reaction
      4. Nomenclature
    3. Applied Physics
      1. Mechanics
      2. States of matter
      3. Properties of gases and gas mixtures
      4. Gas laws
      5. Gas in solution, oxygenation and respiration
      6. Gas movement
      7. Solutions and concentrations
      8. Thermodynamics
    4. Inorganic Chemistry
      1. Acid Base balance, fluid and electrolytes
      2. Inorganic Chemistry Acid Base balance, fluid and electrolyte

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1085 - Respiratory Therapy Procedures 1


    Credit Hours: 5.00
    (6 Contact Hrs)
    (replaces RSPT 1081 and RSPT 1090) RSPT-1085 introduces the patient care process. Topics include patient assessment, cardiopulmonary diagnostics and monitoring techniques, infection control and safety, and protocols and documentation used in the practice of respiratory therapy. Students develop psychomotor skills in respiratory therapy procedures. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and BIOL-2710 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and BIOL-2730 or BIOL-2400, with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-1050
    Corequisite: RSPT-1060


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a patient care plan.

    Objectives:

    1. List the common sections of a patient chart and explain the components of each.
    2. Describe the components of the Respiratory Care Practitioner (RCP) patient interview.
    3. List the categories of a patient “system” assessment done by a Respiratory Therapist (RT).
    4. Perform the essential steps for Respiratory Care procedures.
    5. Demonstrate how to obtain vital signs.
    6. Demonstrate proper technique for auscultation, palpation and percussion.
    7. List the four critical life functions and describe how they are assessed and corrected.
    8. List and describe the six primary symptoms of pulmonary disease and give some examples of abnormalities in lung function associated with these common pulmonary symptoms.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and demonstrate the proper use of cardiopulmonary diagnostic devices and interpret the data provided.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the indications for, demonstrate the ability to set up, maintain, and interpret the data from basic respiratory therapy noninvasive monitors such as:
      1. Pulse oximeter
      2. Capnograph
      3. CO Device
      4. Transcutaneous monitor
      5. Apnea Monitor
    2. Interpret the values obtained for simple laboratory testing.
    3. Demonstrate the basic steps for chest radiograph interpretation and the ability to identify basic normal structures and basic abnormalities.
    4. Demonstrate the ability to interpret the information obtained from a radiology report.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss the different procedures involved in the safe and appropriate administration of respiratory care and perform the different procedures following appropriate infection control and safety techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper technique for infection control
    2. Describe and perform proper body mechanics techniques for moving objects and moving patients.
    3. Describe the methods used to prevent shock hazards in patient situations.
    4. Demonstrate safe use of oxygen and electrical equipment.
    5. Explain how to minimize fire hazards.
    6. Explain the purpose of and the information found on a material safety data sheet.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate proper documentation of respiratory therapy procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the medical and legal issues associated with a medical record.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to follow a therapist driven protocol. Demonstrate the ability to perform traditional charting, S.O.A.P.I.E.R. (Subjective, Objective, Assessment, Plan, Intervention, Evaluation, and Revision) notes and computer charting.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module A: Day in the Life of a Respiratory Therapist

    Module B: Medical Terminology

    Module C: An Overview of the Patient Care Process

    Module D: Infection Control & Safety

    1. Infection Control
    2. Disaster Preparedness
    3. Safety Goals
    4. Body Mechanics
    5. Occupational Safety
    6. Electrical Safety
    7. Fire Safety

    Module E: Patient Assessment

    1. Initial Patient Contact
    2. Chart Review
    3. Interview
    4. Initial Impression
    5. Respiratory Assessment
    6. Cardiac Assessment
    7. Abdominal, Renal, Extremities

    Module F: Noninvasive diagnostic monitoring and testing


    Primary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Secondary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1115 - Respiratory Therapy Procedures 2


    Credit Hours: 7.00
    (9 contact hrs)
    (replaces RSPT-1111 and RSPT-1120) RSPT-1115 is an orientation to the procedures, techniques, and equipment used in the practice of respiratory therapy. Topics covered include use of protocols, oxygen therapy, airway dilation therapy, volume expansion therapy, pulmonary hygiene therapy, airway management, resuscitation, and documentation. Students will develop psychomotor skills in respiratory therapy procedures. Center Campus. Winter semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1050 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1060 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1085 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-1140
    Corequisite: RSPT-1200


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to apply respiratory therapy protocols to differing clinical situations.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a patient scenario, the student will select the appropriate protocol for successful treatment of a patient.
    2. Given a patient scenario, the student will follow the appropriate protocol pathway for successful treatment of a patient.
    3. Given a patient scenario, the student will determine the appropriate followup action once the desired response to the therapy has or has not been achieved.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to develop a respiratory patient care plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform data gathering through chart review, interview, diagnostic testing and patient assessment.
    2. Given a patient scenario, interpret the data and determine the appropriate action required.
    3. Given a patient scenario, select the protocols necessary and incorporate them into a care plan.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability use respiratory therapy equipment while performing the procedures involved in the safe and appropriate administration of therapies.

    Objectives:

    1. Using a lab partner or anatomic model, demonstrate the ability to select, set up, maintain, and troubleshoot diagnostic and therapeutic respiratory therapy equipment.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to perform respiratory therapy procedures in a safe and appropriate manner.
    3. Using a lab partner or anatomic model, demonstrate the ability to setup, monitor and discontinue oxygen therapy.
    4. Using a lab partner or anatomic model, demonstrate the ability to draw up medications, perform aerosol therapy, monitor, and discontinue airway dilation therapy.
    5. Using a lab partner or anatomic model, demonstrate the ability to administer, monitor and discontinue volume expansion therapy.
    6. Using a lab partner or anatomic model, demonstrate the ability to administer, monitor and discontinue pulmonary hygiene therapy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss and demonstrate ways to establish and maintain a patent airway and adequate artificial ventilation.

    Objectives:

    1. List and compare the options available for establishing an open airway.
    2. Describe the indications for, advantages of and disadvantages for the most common artificial airways.
    3. Given a patient scenario, describe the technique most appropriate for maintaining a patent airway and adequate artificial ventilation.
    4. On an anatomical model, demonstrate the ability to select, properly insert, maintain, and remove the following airways:
      1. Oral pharyngeal airways
      2. Nasal pharyngeal airways
      3. Troubleshooting
    5. On an anatomical model, demonstrate the ability to provide adequate artificial ventilation with the following devices:
      1. Fluid shield.
      2. Pocket mask.
      3. Bag-valve-mask.
      4. Demand valve.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to perform chest compressions
    2. Demonstrate the ability to open an airway and provide ventilation
    3. Demonstrate set up and use of a defibrillator

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate proper documentation of respiratory therapy procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to complete the most common types of respiratory care documentation:
      1. Oxygen form.
      2. Treatment form.
      3. Data gathering (triage form)
      4. Care plan.
    2. Compare the benefits and drawbacks of the three major forms of charting.
    3. Describe the purpose of a patient chart, discuss some of the legal aspects of recordkeeping and list some general rules for medical record keeping.
    4. Describe the components of a traditional medical record.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module A: Diagnostics

    1. Pulmonary Function Testing
    2. Cardiovascular
    3. Blood Gases

    Module B: Protocols and Documentation

    1. Respiratory Therapy Consult Service
    2. Treatment Protocols
    3. Respiratory Disorders and Scenarios
    4. The Medical Record

    Module C: Medical Gas Therapy

    1. Compressed Gases
    2. Oxygen Therapy
    3. Delivery Systems
    4. Humidity and Aerosol Therapy

    Module D: Aerosol Medication Delivery

    1. Selecting Equipment
    2. Administration
    3. Monitoring Effectiveness

    Module E: Pulmonary Hygiene

    1. Directed Cough
    2. Breathing Retraining and Inspiratory Muscle Strengthening
    3. Bland Aerosols
    4. Mucolytics
    5. Chest PhysioTherapy
    6. Positive Airway Pressure Therapy
    7. Secretion Clearance Devices

    Module F: Volume Expansion

    1. Incentive Spirometry
    2. Intermittent Positive Pressure Breathing
    3. Continuous Positive Pressure Therapy

    Module G: Emergency Management

    1. Normal airway
    2. Opening the airway
    3. Pharyngeal airway adjuncts
    4. Equipment for Ventilation and Defibrillation
    5. CPR Techniques

    Primary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Secondary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1140 - Cardiopulmonary Pathology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    RSPT-1140 is a detailed study of disease affecting the cardiovascular and pulmonary systems. The student will study the assessment process and the role of the Respiratory Care Practitioner in developing and implementing therapist-driven protocols. The anatomic alterations, etiology, clinical manifestations, and patient care plan will be reviewed for each disease process. Center Campus. Winter semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1050 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1060 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1085 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-1115
    Corequisite: RSPT-1200


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the assessment process and the role of the Respiratory Care Practitioner in developing and implementing therapist driven protocols.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the results of an arterial blood sample, interpret the acid base disturbance, degree of compensation, and level of oxygenation present.
    2. Given the results of a pulmonary function study, determine the type and severity of respiratory disorder present.
    3. Describe the physical assessment techniques used in the pulmonary assessment of a patient.
    4. List the five respiratory protocols and describe when each is used.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to state the clinical definition of the disease and describe the etiology of each disorder.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, state a definition of the disease.
    2. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, state the etiology of the disease.
    3. Given a cardiovascular disease, state a definition of the disease.
    4. Given a cardiovascular disease, state the etiology of the disease.
    5. Given a disease of the neurological system, state a definition of the disease.
    6. Given a disease of the neurological system, state the etiology of the disease.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the anatomic alterations of the lungs caused by common respiratory disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, state the anatomic alteration associated with the disease.
    2. Given a cardiovascular disease, state the anatomic alteration associated with the disease.
    3. Given a disease of the neurological system, state the anatomic alteration associated with the disease.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the major pathophysiologic mechanisms activated throughout the respiratory system as a result of the anatomic alterations.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, state the pathophysiologic alterations associated with the disease.
    2. Given a cardiovascular disease, state the pathophysiologic alterations associated with the disease.
    3. Given a disease of the neurological system, state the pathophysiologic alterations associated with the disease.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the common clinical manifestations that develop as a result of pulmonary and cardiovascular disease.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, describe the clinical manifestations associated with the disease.
    2. Given a cardiovascular disease, describe the clinical manifestations associated with the disease.
    3. Given a disease of the neurological system, describe the clinical manifestations associated with the disease.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the assessment data & develop an appropriate treatment care plan for each disease process.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, list the assessment data that should be performed to treat the disease.
    2. Given a disease of the pulmonary system, list components of the treatment plan used in the management of the disease.
    3. Given a cardiovascular disease, list the assessment data that should be performed to treat the disease.
    4. Given a cardiovascular disease, list components of the treatment plan used in the management of the disease.
    5. Given a disease of the neurological system, list the assessment data that should be performed to treat the disease.
    6. Given a disease of the neurological system, list components of the treatment plan used in the management of the disease.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the role of the RCP in disease prevention.

    Objectives:

    1. List interventions that Respiratory Care Practitioners can use to treat patients with pulmonary disorders.
    2. List interventions that Respiratory Care Practitioners can use to treat patients with cardiovascular disorders.
    3. List interventions that Respiratory Care Practitioners can use to treat patients with neurological disorders.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Mechanical Ventilation
      1. Modes
      2. Elimination of PaCO2
      3. Improvement of Oxygenation
    2. Assessment Process
    3. Therapist Driven Protocols
    4. Chronic Obstructive Lung Diseases
      1. Asthma
      2. Emphysema
      3. Bronchieactasis
      4. Chronic Bronchitis
      5. Cystic Fibrosis
      6. Croup
      7. Epiglottitis
    5. Cardiovascular Diseases
      1. Myocardial Infarction
      2. Congestive Heart Failure
      3. Pulmonary Embolism
      4. Cerebral Vascular Accident
    6. Flail Chest
    7. Pneumothorax
    8. Neuromuscular Disease
    9. Sleep Disorder
    10. ARDS
    11. Atelectasis
    12. Cancer of the Lung
    13. Drowning
    14. Interstitial Lung Disease
    15. Smoke Inhalation
    16. Pneumonia
    17. Lung Abscess
    18. Tuberculosis
    19. AIDS

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1200 - Cardiopulmonary Pharmacology


    Credit Hours: 1.50
    (3 contact hrs)
    RSPT-1200 is designed to teach aerosol delivery of respiratory medications that are specifically delivered by respiratory care practitioners. An in-depth study of the autonomic nervous system will be covered to explain the mechanism of drug actions. The student will learn indications, modes of delivery, dosages, and adverse reactions of respiratory medications. The student also will be introduced to critical care pharmacology. Center Campus. Winter semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1050 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1060 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1085 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-1115
    Corequisite: RSPT-1140


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify and describe the generic and trade names, routes of administration, dosages, mechanism of action, and adverse reactions of all respiratory medication (Respiratory Medication Packet).

    Objectives:

    1. Given a respiratory medication, state the generic and trade names.
    2. Given a respiratory medication, state its most common routes of administration and the dosage associated with that route.
    3. Given a respiratory medication, state the mechanism of action.
    4. Given a respiratory medication, state the hazards, complications, and adverse reactions associated with that medication.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will identify and describe the generic and trade names, routes of administration, mechanism of action, and adverse reactions to all critical care medications (Advanced Critical Care Medication Packet).

    Objectives:

    1. Given a critical care medication, state the generic and trade names.
    2. Given a critical care medication, state its most common routes of administration and the dosage associated with that route.
    3. Given a critical care medication, state the mechanism of action.
    4. Given a critical care medication, state the hazards, complications, and adverse reactions associated with that medication.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will develop an in-depth knowledge of the autonomic nervous system and be able to apply this knowledge in describing the action of respiratory and critical care medications.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function of the neural junction.
    2. Compare and contrast the sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system.
    3. Compare and contrast adrenergic and cholinergic receptors.
    4. Differentiate between the different methods of bronchodilation.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will interpret and evaluate a medication order, perform drug calculations, and safely administer aerosol therapy.

    Objectives:

    1. List the components of a proper medication order.
    2. Compare and contrast different methods of aerosol delivery.
    3. Given appropriate information, derive drug dosage calculations.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will recognize adverse reactions to medications and take appropriate actions.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the procedure you would follow in the event of an adverse reaction.
    2. Describe how a respiratory care practitioner can decrease the incidence of oral fungal infections when administering aerosolized steroids.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will apply and evaluate assessment data and respiratory physiology to determine the appropriate drug therapy and treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. List those agents used as an aid to smoking cessation for the relief of nicotine withdrawal.
    2. Describe how a treatment protocol can be used to titrate medication delivery for an asthmatic patient.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. General Pharmacologic Principles
      1. Generic and Trade Names
      2. Classification
      3. Indications
      4. Actions
      5. Adverse Reactions
      6. Contraindications
      7. Dosages
    2. Drug Dosing
      1. Solute
      2. Solvent
      3. Solution
      4. Percent of Solution
      5. Mass of Drug
      6. Volume of Drug
      7. Neuroreceptors
    3. Bronchodilators
      1. Mechanism of Action
      2. Sympathomimetics
      3. AntiCholinergics
      4. Xanthines
    4. Aerosol Delivery
      1. Small Volume Nebulizers
      2. Continuous Aerosol Therapy
      3. Metered Dose Inhalers
      4. Dry Powdered Inhalers
      5. Small Particle Aerosol Generators
    5. Mucolytics
    6. Anti-Inflammatory Agents
      1. Mast Cell Stabilizers
      2. Leukotriene Antagonists
      3. Corticosteroids
    7. Anti-Infective Agents
    8. Surface Active Agents
    9. Anesthetic Agents
    10. Nicotine Replacement Therapy
    11. Cardiovascular Agents
    12. Neuromuscular Blocking Agents

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1210 - Pediatric/Neonatal Respiratory Care


    Credit Hours: 1.50
    (3 contact hrs)
    RSPT-1210 introduces students to neonatal and pediatric respiratory care. The course covers fetal lung development, anatomy and physiology, neonatal development, pathology, CPR, acid-base monitoring, and introduction to mechanical ventilation of the newborn. Center Campus. Winter Semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program

    Corequisite: RSPT-1115
    Corequisite: RSPT-1140


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop an understanding of the changes in anatomy and physiology of the cardiopulmonary system that occur from conception through the early neonatal period.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate the phases of prenatal cardiopulmonary development.
    2. Differentiate between the different phases of labor and delivery.
    3. Identify and describe the factors that cause changes in cardiopulmonary anatomy and physiology during the first minutes of postuterine life.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will develop an understanding of the cardiopulmonary pathologies that exist in the infant and child.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a neonatal respiratory disorder, describe the pathophysiologic alterations present.
    2. Given a neonatal cardiac defect, describe the pathophysiologic alterations present.
    3. Given a neonatal respiratory disorder, describe the therapeutic interventions used to treat the disorder.
    4. Given a neonatal cardiac defect, describe the therapeutic interventions used to treat the disorder.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will utilize information gathered from laboratory, diagnostic testing, and patient assessment to evaluate respiratory and cardiac function.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between the various methods of assessing cardiovascular status during the perinatal period.
    2. Given a clinical scenario, convert the baby’s weight to the desired units, calculate the baby’s Apgar score, and suggest appropriate interventions based upon the measured score.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will apply pharmacological agents to the treatment protocol of infants and children with respiratory and cardiac disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a respiratory medication, state the indication, contraindication, dosage, mechanism of action, and adverse reactions associated with its use.
    2. Describe how a respiratory care protocol can be used to manage a patient with cardiopulmonary disease in the neonatal or pediatric period.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will analyze and evaluate respiratory treatment with the use of invasive and non-invasive monitoring.

    Objectives:

    1. State the indication for an umbilical arterial line and describe the technique for placement.
    2. Differentiate between the various methods available to control arterial blood-gas values.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will apply airway management and resuscitative techniques and protocols from the American Heart Association Pediatric Advanced Life Support (PALS) guidelines and evaluate patient response.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical scenario where a neonate/infant/child needs to be intubated, select the correct equipment and describe the technique required to successfully intubate the patient and manage the airway.
    2. Describe the technique associated with cardiopulmonary resuscitation in the infant.
    3. Describe the technique associated with cardiopulmonary resuscitation in the child.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Embryonic Development
    2. Assessment of Fetal Growth
    3. Assessment of Labor and Delivery
    4. Post-Delivery Stabilization and Recovery
    5. Assessment of the Newborn
    6. Thermal Regulation
    7. Mechanical Ventilation
    8. Neonatal Diseases
    9. Congenital Heart Diseases
    10. Pediatric Diseases.

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1260 - Clinical Internship 1


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (40 contact hrs per week for 8 wks)
    This course introduces the student to clinical practice by providing 32 hours/week of clinical training in a hospital setting. Students perform basic respiratory therapy procedures learned in the procedures laboratory (RSPT-1090 and RSPT-1120). The laboratory portion of the course includes an eight-hour/week workshop held at the college. The lab is designed to introduce the student to the concepts and psychomotor skills necessary to care for patients on mechanical ventilators. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program. Center Campus. Spring/Summer semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1115, with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1140, with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1200, with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1210, with grade C or better


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
    2. Have the following in their possession at all times:
      1. Results of personal physical examination.
      2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
      3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
      4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result.
      5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
      6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
    3. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the health care team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will adequately demonstrate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion, and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to implement and evaluate a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will develop psychomotor skills in performing basic respiratory therapy procedures according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate successful completion of the following performance evaluations:
      1. Hand Washing. (#1)
      2. Oxygen Supply Systems. (#2)
      3. Oxygen Delivery Devices. (#3)
      4. Oxygen Tent. (#4)
      5. Oxygen Therapy. (#5)
      6. Oxygen Rounds. (#6)
      7. Aerosol Therapy. (#7)
      8. Metered Dose Inhaler. (#8)
      9. Incentive Spirometry. (#9)
      10. IPPB. (#11)
      11. Chest Physical Therapy. (#12)
      12. Suctioning. (#13)
      13. Manual Resuscitation - Adult. (#14)
      14. Manual Resuscitation - Infant. (#15)
      15. Intubation and Alternate Airways. (#16)
      16. Arterial Blood-Gas Sampling. (#18 Optional)
      17. Pulse Oximetry. (#29)

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will compare and contrast the different modes of mechanical ventilation and demonstrate proficiency in ventilating lung models in the laboratory setting.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to disassemble, process, reassemble, and perform a self-test on a ventilator to ascertain proper function prior to placement on a patient.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to prepare a mechanical ventilator in the assist/control (A/C) mode.
    3. Demonstrate the ability to make ventilator changes and to troubleshoot when problems arise.
    4. Demonstrate proper documentation of the patient-ventilator interface.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Airway Resistance
    2. Lung Compliance
    3. Deadspace Ventilation
    4. Ventilatory Failure
    5. Oxygenation Failure
    6. Indications for Mechanical Ventilation
    7. Pulmonary Considerations
    8. Cardiovascular Considerations
    9. Hemodynamic Considerations
    10. Renal Considerations
    11. Ventilatory Work
    12. Input Power
    13. Drive Mechanism
    14. Control Circuit
    15. Control Variables
    16. Phase Variables
    17. Output Waveforms
    18. Alarm Systems
    19. Negative and Positive Pressure Ventilation
    20. Operating Modes of Ventilation
    21. Positive End Expiratory Pressure (PEEP)
    22. Continuous Positive Airway Pressure (CPAP)
    23. Controlled Ventilation
    24. Assist-Control Ventilation
    25. Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation
    26. Pressure Support Ventilation
    27. Tube Compensation
    28. Dual-Control Mode Ventilation
    29. Physiologic Effects of Noninvasive Positive Pressure Ventilation (NIPPV)
    30. Continuous Positive Airway Pressure (CPAP)
    31. Bi-level Positive Airway Pressure (BiPAP)
    32. Common Interfaces for CPAP and Bi-PAP
    33. Interface Problems
    34. CPAP/BiPAP Titration
    35. Indication for Mechanical Ventilation
    36. Contraindications for Mechanical Ventilation
    37. Initial Ventilator Settings
    38. Ventilator Alarm Settings
    39. Hazards and Complications of Mechanical Ventilation
    40. Patient Assessment
    41. Fluid Balance
    42. Anion Gap
    43. Arterial Blood Assessment
    44. Oxygen Saturation
    45. Flow Waveforms
    46. Pressure Waveforms
    47. Volume Waveforms

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2250 - Clinical Internship 2


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (20 contact hrs per week for the first 8 wks)
    This course requires respiratory therapy students to complete 160 hours of clinical training experience. Objectives focus on pulmonary function testing, critical care pharmacology, arterial blood gases, and an introduction to mechanical ventilation. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1260

    Corequisite: RSPT-2335
    Corequisite: RSPT-2350


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    CRITICAL CARE ROTATION I

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
    2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will adequately demonstrate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate an arterial blood draw from an arterial line, interpret results of an arterial blood gas and recommend appropriate treatment.

    Objectives:

    1. State the normal values associated with blood-gas analysis.
    2. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, make appropriate recommendations to correct the acid-base and oxygenation status.
    3. Demonstrate the proper procedure for drawing blood from an arterial line.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will develop psychomotor skills in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24-hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.

    CRITICAL CARE ROTATION II

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate further development of professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
    2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate growth in effective and accurate communication skills, demonstrated thorough oral and written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate continued improvement of adequate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate continued competency in correlating assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate further development of psychomotor skills used in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24-hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate competency in performing bedside pulmonary function measurements.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper calibration of a bedside pulmonary function device.
    2. Instruct a patient on how to perform a Forced Vital Capacity (FVC), Flow-Volume Loop (FVL), and Mandatory Volume Ventilation (MVV).

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, when given pulmonary function data, students will determine if a post-bronchodilator study is indicated and be able to calculate the percent change between pre- and post-bronchodilator measurements.

    PEDIATRIC SPECIALTY ROTATION

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities. The student will:
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
    2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will develop psychomotor skills in performing capillary and arterial blood sampling, and will be able to interpret results and recommend an appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and list normal capillary/arterial blood gas values.
    2. Observe the proper procedure for performing a capillary blood gas.
    3. Given a capillary or arterial blood gas:
      1. Interpret the CBG/ABG
      2. Make recommendations to treat the acid base and/or oxygenation abnormality.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to initiate, monitor and recommend an appropriate treatment plan for patients receiving ventilatory life support and be able to evaluate patient’s response.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    2. Perform a routine ventilator check according to department policy and procedure.
    3. Calculate appropriate values used to assess the pediatric or neonatal patient during mechanical ventilation.
    4. Complete patient assessment forms as designated by the clinical instructor.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate safe administration of all respiratory therapy procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and maintain an oxygen hood.
    2. Observe endotracheal suctioning utilizing sterile technique.
    3. Demonstrate the proper procedure of bag/mask or bag/tube ventilation.
    4. Demonstrate the proper procedure for administering aerosolized medications.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate, assess and evaluate the patient’s cardiovascular status using invasive and/or noninvasive monitoring devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and maintain a pulse oximeter.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Critical Care I
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis(OPTIONAL)
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24-hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Routine Ventilator Check
      7. Non-Invasive Ventilation
    2. Critical Care II
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24-hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Ventilator Circuit Change
      7. Routine Ventilator Check
      8. Non-Invasive Ventilation
      9. Bedside Pulmonary Function
    3. Pediatric/Neonatal
      1. Ventilator Set -up
      2. Ventilator Circuit Change
      3. Routine Ventilator Check
      4. Neonatal/Pediatric Ventilator
      5. Manual Ventilation
      6. Capillary Blood Gas

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2260 - Clinical Internship 3


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (20 contact hrs per week for the second 8 wks)
    This course requires respiratory therapy students to complete 160 additional hours of clinical training experience in an affiliated hospital. Objectives focus on pulmonary function testing, critical care pharmacology, arterial blood gases, and mechanical ventilation. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program

    Corequisite: RSPT-2335
    Corequisite: RSPT-2350


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    CRITICAL CARE ROTATION I

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, the student will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Consistently have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result.
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
      2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, the student will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, the student will adequately demonstrate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, the student will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate an arterial blood draw from an arterial line, interpret results of an arterial blood gas and recommend appropriate treatment.

    Objectives:

    1. State the normal values associated with blood-gas analysis.
    2. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, make appropriate recommendations to correct the acid-base and oxygenation status.
    3. Demonstrate the proper procedure for drawing blood from an arterial line.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of the course, the student will develop psychomotor skills in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24-hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to setup a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.

    CRITICAL CARE ROTATION II

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate further development of professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result.
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
      2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate growth in effective and accurate communication skills, demonstrated thorough oral and written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate continued improvement of adequate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate continued competency in correlating assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status, given appropriate patient information.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate further development of psychomotor skills used in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to setup a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate competency in performing bedside pulmonary function measurements.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper calibration of a bedside pulmonary function device.
    2. Instruct a patient on how to perform a Forced Vital Capacity (FVC), Flow-Volume Loop (FVL), and Mandatory Volume Ventilation. (MVV)
    3. When given pulmonary function data, will determine if a post-bronchodilator study is indicated and be able to calculate the percent change between pre- and post-bronchodilator measurements.

    PEDIATRIC SPECIALTY ROTATION

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, the student will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result.
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
      2. Demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, the student will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, the student will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status, given appropriate patient information.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, the student will The student will develop psychomotor skills in performing capillary and arterial blood sampling, and will be able to interpret results and recommend an appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and list normal capillary/arterial blood-gas values.
    2. Observe the proper procedure for performing a capillary blood gas.
    3. Given a capillary or arterial blood gas,:
      1. Interpret the CBG/ABG.
      2. Make recommendations to treat the acid base and/or oxygenation abnormality.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to initiate, monitor and recommend an appropriate treatment plan for patients receiving ventilatory life support and be able to evaluate patient’s response.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    2. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    3. Calculate appropriate values used to assess the pediatric or neonatal patient during mechanical ventilation.
    4. Complete patient assessment forms as designated by the clinical instructor.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate safe administration of all respiratory therapy procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and maintain an oxygen hood.
    2. Observe endotracheal suctioning utilizing sterile technique.
    3. Demonstrate the proper procedure of bag/mask or bag/tube ventilation.
    4. Demonstrate the proper procedure for administering aerosolized medications.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of the course, the student will correlate, assess and evaluate the patient’s cardiovascular status using invasive and/or noninvasive monitoring devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and maintain a pulse oximeter.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Critical Care I
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis (OPTIONAL)
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24-hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Routine Ventilator Check
      7. Non-Invasive Ventilation
    2. Pediatric/Neonatal
      1. Ventilator Set up
      2. Ventilator Circuit Change
      3. Routine Ventilator Check
      4. Neonatal/Pediatric Ventilator
      5. Manual Ventilation
      6. Capillary Blood Gas
    3. Critical Care II
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Ventilator Circuit Change
      7. Routine Ventilator Check
      8. Non-Invasive Ventilation
      9. Bedside Pulmonary Function

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2335 - Mechanical Ventilation


    Credit Hours: 5.00
    (6 Contact Hrs)
    (replaces RSPT-2331 and RSPT-2341) RSPT-2335 reviews the effects of mechanical ventilation on cardiopulmonary physiology. The course will evaluate the capabilities and limitations of the most commonly used mechanical ventilators. Students will develop cognitive and psychomotor skills necessary for initiating, assessing, maintaining, monitoring, adjusting, problem solving, discontinuing, documenting, and applying protocols to mechanical ventilation on infant, pediatric, and adult patients. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1260

    Corequisite: RSPT-2250
    Corequisite: RSPT-2350


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to determine when and how mechanical ventilation should be initiated and discontinued based on patient assessment and diagnostic information.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize situations where mechanical ventilation is needed.
    2. Given a patient scenario, initiate the proper form of ventilation and input the initial parameters to begin ventilation.
    3. Assess weaning readiness and wean a patient from mechanical ventilation.
    4. Disassemble and process the ventilators presented in this course.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss the physiologic and pathologic consequences of mechanical ventilation.

    Objectives:

    1. List the hazards and complications of mechanical ventilation.
    2. Describe the methods used to decrease or eliminate the hazards and complications.
    3. Use critical thinking skills to detect and solve problems associated with ventilator patients.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and demonstrate the use of monitoring and diagnostic techniques and equipment used with mechanical ventilator patients.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the purpose of, set up, maintain, and interpret noninvasive monitors such as pulse oximetry, capnography, and electrocardiography (ECG) on a simulated ventilator patient.
    2. Set up and interpret ventilator graphics.
    3. Obtain and interpret respiratory mechanics and weaning data.
    4. Given a clinical scenario, determine the appropriate action to be taken for a ventilator patient based on assessment and diagnostic information.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to compare and contrast the different features available on mechanical ventilators and the clinical indications for their use.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the different modes of ventilation available on the newer ventilators and the situations where their use is most appropriate.
    2. Explain the features available to make triggering and cycling of the ventilator easier for the patient.
    3. Describe the latest features available to improve patient-ventilator synchrony.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to utilize assessment and ventilator protocols in the management of ventilator patients.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a patient scenario, demonstrate the ability to follow a protocol to:
      1. Improve oxygenation
      2. Improve ventilation
      3. Wean a patient from ventilation
      4. Demonstrate the ability to correct ventilator associated complications.
    2. Given a patient scenario, demonstrate the ability to follow a protocol in the treatment of specific conditions such as:
      1. Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome (A.R.D.S.)
      2. Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (C.O.P.D.)
      3. Closed head injury
      4. Asthma
    3. Apply adjunct therapy to a ventilator patient such as medication delivery and airway management.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate proper documentation of ventilator patient care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to document via:
      1. Traditional charting
      2. Computerized charting
      3. S.O.A.P.I.E.R. (Subjective, Objective, Assessment, Plan, Intervention, Evaluation, and Revision) Notes
    2. Explain the medical and legal issues associated with documentation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    MODULE A: AIRWAY MANAGEMENT

    Lesson #1 - Pharyngeal, laryngeal and esophageal airways
    Lesson #2 - Tracheal airways
    Lesson #3 - Airway clearance
    Lesson #4 - Advanced airways
    Lesson #5 - Airway complications and emergencies

    MODULE B: MONITORING DURING MECHANICAL VENTILATION

    Lesson #1 Ventilator waveforms
    Lesson #2 - Ventilator mechanics
    Lesson #3 Loops

    MODULE C: MANAGEMENT OF THE VENTILATOR PATIENT

    Lesson #1 - COPD
    Lesson #2 - Asthma
    Lesson #3 ARDS

    MODULE D: NEWBORN AND PEDIATRIC VENTILATION

    Lesson #1 Use of CPAP
    Lesson #2 Neonatal Time Cycled, Pressure-Limited Ventilation
    Lesson #3 Pediatric Volume ventilation
    Lesson #4 High frequency ventilation
    Lesson #5 Adjuncts to conventional mechanical ventilator support

    MODULE E: DISCONTINUATION FROM VENTILATION AND LONG TERM CARE

    Lesson #1 Assessment of weaning readiness
    Lesson #2 Methods of weaning
    Lesson #3 Accessories (Passy-Muir valves…)
    Lesson #4 Special considerations in the home or ECF environment
    Lesson #5 - Transport


    Primary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Secondary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2350 - Acid-Base & Electrolyte Balance & Advanced Diagnostics


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This theory course teaches students how to draw, analyze, interpret, and evaluate arterial/venous blood gas and electrolyte data, and make appropriate recommendations for treatment. Students also will learn how to use data obtained from non-invasive monitoring to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of pulmonary disease. Center Campus. Fall semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-1260

    Corequisite: RSPT-2250
    Corequisite: RSPT-2335


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the proper procedure for performing an arterial and capillary puncture. (Module B)

    Objectives:

    1. List the sites used for arterial punctures and state the benefits and hazards associated with each.
    2. Describe the technique used for sampling blood from an artery.
    3. Describe infection control procedures that should be followed when drawing an arterial blood sample.
    4. List three possible complications of arterial punctures.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will describe and demonstrate the proper procedure for drawing an ABG sample from an arterial line. (Module B)

    Objectives:

    1. List the sites used for placement of an indwelling arterial catheter.
    2. Given a stopcock assembly (or diagram of one), state the proper stopcock positions to sample arterial blood and to flush the system.
    3. Draw a picture of an arterial waveform and label the horizontal and vertical axis and designate the position of a dicrotic notch.
    4. Define the term dampened as it refers to an arterial pressure waveform.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the effect of ventilation and perfusion on arterial blood-gas results. (Module D)

    Objectives:

    1. List the five types of Ventilation/Perfusion (V/Q) relationships, state how the relationship of ventilation to perfusion changes from the apices to the base of the lung and describe how West’s lung zones relate to each.
    2. State how changes in cardiac output affect distribution of perfusion in the lung.
    3. Explain how mechanical ventilation affects the distribution of ventilation and perfusion.
    4. Distinguish between the different types of deadspace ventilation and state how each is determined and what the normal level is.
    5. Distinguish between the different types of shunt ventilation and state how each is determined and what the normal level is.
    6. Given a diagram of the alveolar-capillary membrane, diagram the normal driving pressures for O2 and CO2 and describe the factors that affect gas diffusion.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the process by which oxygen gets from the alveolus to the tissues of the body. List the two ways oxygen is carried in the blood and normal values of each. (Module E and F)

    Objectives:

    1. List the indices that are used to assess oxygenation and describe how each affect the total amount of oxygen carried in the blood.
    2. Given appropriate known values, calculate the oxygen content, arterial/venous oxygen content difference, shunt fraction, arterial/alveolar oxygen ratio, and oxygen delivery.
    3. List the factors that shift the oxyhemoglobin curve to the right and to the left.
    4. Describe the causes of hypoxemia and hypoxia and state how each is treated.
    5. Define Internal Respiration and list factors that affect the cellular oxygen supply.
    6. State the formula for calculating the respiratory quotient (RQ) and describe how it is measured at the bedside.
    7. List three clinical situations where hypoxia can exist without hypoxemia.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the process by which carbon dioxide is removed from the body. (Module G)

    Objectives:

    1. List the three ways CO2 is transported in the plasma and the three ways it is transported in the RBC.
    2. Given the appropriate data, calculate the carbon dioxide content and state the normal values for each parameter.
    3. Describe the relationship between PaCO2, H ions, and pH.
    4. Describe the ratio of HCO3ions to H2CO3 (PaCO2).
    5. Given two of the following three variables, calculate the third:
      1. PaCO2
      2. Alveolar Minute Ventilation
      3. VCO2 (Carbon Dioxide Production)
    6. List ways to correct an abnormal PaCO2 level in the blood.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will interpret and evaluate arterial/venous blood gas results with respect to oxygenation, ventilation and acid-base balance and recommend appropriate therapy. (Module A, H, I, and J)

    Objectives:

    1. List the normal values for arterial and venous blood gas and CO-Oximetry studies.
    2. Given an ABG, interpret the results, including the degree of compensation, the degree of hypoxemia present, and any appropriate treatment.
    3. List the three physiologic processes assessed with blood gas data and state how each are assessed with blood-gas or CO-Oximetry studies.
    4. Define a buffer system and differentiate between the buffering systems present in the body.
    5. Given an arterial blood-gas result, determine the degree of pH change that would result from an acute change in PaCO2.
    6. Given a diagram of the kidney, identify the key anatomical structures and state their function.
    7. Describe how the kidney maintains a normal level of electrolytes and buffers.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will evaluate for blood gas errors and explain the effects of these errors on ABG data results. (Module C)

    Objectives:

    1. List the six types of arterial blood sampling errors and describe the effect of the error on the results of blood-gas values.
    2. State how pulse oximetry may be helpful in distinguishing arterial from venous blood samples.
    3. State the effect of increased or decreased body temperature on blood gas results.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate values obtained during noninvasive monitoring with the pathophysiology of the patient’s disease state and formulate an effective treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function, setup, maintenance and troubleshooting of a pulse oximeter.
    2. Describe the function, setup, maintenance and troubleshooting of a transcutaneous oxygen or carbon dioxide monitor.
    3. Describe the function, setup, maintenance and troubleshooting of a capnometer.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Normal Arterial Blood-Gas Values
    2. Normal Venous Blood-Gas Values
    3. Gas Laws and Altitude
    4. Oxygen Content
    5. Arterial Puncture
    6. Blood-Gas Analysis
    7. Sampling Errors
    8. External Diffusion
    9. Oxygen Transport
    10. Oxygenation
    11. Ventilation
    12. Acid-Base Balance
    13. Renal Function
    14. Non-Invasive Monitoring

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2360 - Clinical Internship 4


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (20 contact hrs per week for the first 8 wks)
    RSPT-2360 requires respiratory therapy students to complete 160 additional hours of clinical training in an affiliated hospital. Objectives focus on acid-base balance, mechanical ventilation, pulmonary function testing, electrocardiography, and hemodynamic monitoring. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program. Center Campus. Winter Semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2260 with grade Pass

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2335 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2350 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-2420
    Corequisite: RSPT-2431


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    1Critical Care Rotation II

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate further development of professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Consistently have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest xray result
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
      2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in effective and accurate communication skills, demonstrated thorough oral and written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate continued improvement of adequate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate continued competency in correlating assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate further development of psychomotor skills used in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate competency in performing bedside pulmonary function measurements.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper calibration of a bedside pulmonary function device.
    2. Instruct a patient on how to perform a Forced Vital Capacity (FVC), FlowVolume Loop (FVL), and Mandatory Volume Ventilation (MVV)
    3. Determine if a postbronchodilator study is indicated and be able to calculate the percent change between preand postbronchodilator measurements, when given pulmonary function data.

    Critical Care Rotation III

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate further development of professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently Arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
    2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate growth in effective and accurate communication skills, demonstrated thorough oral and written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, the student will consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, the student will demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, the student will indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will continued improvement of adequate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate continued competency in correlating assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate further development of psychomotor skills used in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.
    5. Interpret a given ABG and implement ventilatory changes to correct the acid/base and oxygenation abnormalities.
    6. Demonstrate the correct procedure for determining intracuff pressures.
    7. Identify and troubleshoot any abnormal ventilator waveforms.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate competency in performing tracheostomy care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper technique for tracheostomy care.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, given an ECG tracing, students will state the dysrhythmia present and list treatment options.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, given hemodynamic data, students will be able to calculate desired hemodynamic indices and differentiate the shock state present.

    Pediatric Specialty Rotation

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
      2. Demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, the student will consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, the student will demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, the student will indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status, given appropriate patient information.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will develop psychomotor skills in performing capillary and arterial blood sampling, and will be able to interpret results and recommend an appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and list normal capillary/arterial blood-gas values.
    2. Observe the proper procedure for performing a capillary blood gas.
    3. Given a capillary or arterial blood gas,:
      1. Interpret the CBG/ABG.
      2. Make recommendations to treat the acid base and/or oxygenation abnormality.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to initiate, monitor, and recommend an appropriate treatment plan for patients receiving ventilatory life support and be able to evaluate patient’s response.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    2. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    3. Calculate appropriate values used to assess the pediatric or neonatal patient during mechanical ventilation.
    4. Complete patient assessment forms as designated by the clinical instructor.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate safe administration of all respiratory therapy procedures

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and maintain an oxygen hood.
    2. Observe endotracheal suctioning utilizing sterile technique.
    3. Demonstrate the proper procedure of bag/mask or bag/tube ventilation.
    4. Demonstrate the proper procedure for administering aerosolized medications.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate, assess and evaluate the patient’s cardiovascular status using invasive and/or noninvasive monitoring devices.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will set up and maintain a pulse oximeter.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Pediatric/Neonatal
      1. Ventilator Set up
      2. Ventilator Circuit Change
      3. Routine Ventilator Check
      4. Neonatal/Pediatric Ventilator
      5. Manual Ventilation
      6. Capillary Blood Gas
    2. Critical Care II
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Ventilator Circuit Change
      7. Routine Ventilator Check
      8. Non-Invasive Ventilation
      9. Bedside Pulmonary Function
    3. Critical Care III
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Ventilator Circuit Change
      7. Routine Ventilator Check
      8. Non-Invasive Ventilation
      9. Tracheostomy Care
      10. Arrhythmia Recognition

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2370 - Clinical Internship 5


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (20 contact hrs per week for the second 8 wks)
    RSPT-2370 provides additional clinical experience for the respiratory therapy student. The student must complete 160 hours of clinical training in an area hospital. Objectives focus on pulmonary function testing, acid-base balance, mechanical ventilation, electrocardiology, and hemodynamic monitoring. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program. Center Campus. Winter semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program

    Corequisite: RSPT-2420
    Corequisite: RSPT-2431


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Critical Care III

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate further development of professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest xray result.
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
    2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate growth in effective and accurate communication skills, demonstrated thorough oral and written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will continued improvement of adequate patient assessment skills through inspection, palpation, percussion and auscultation and correlate the results to the patient’s pathophysiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify the proper assessment techniques required.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently state the anticipated outcomes of the assessment intervention.
    3. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper technique of assessment intervention.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate continued competency in correlating assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status, given.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate further development of psychomotor skills used in performing respiratory therapy procedures safely and according to the acceptable treatment protocol.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper procedure of suctioning with a 24-hour suction catheter.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    3. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    4. Perform an assessment of the patient’s readiness to be liberated from mechanical ventilation.
    5. Interpret a given ABG and implement ventilatory changes to correct the acid/base and oxygenation abnormalities.
    6. Demonstrate the correct procedure for determining intracuff pressures.
    7. Identify and troubleshoot any abnormal ventilator waveforms.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate competency in performing tracheostomy care.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate proper technique for tracheostomy care.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, given an ECG tracing, students will state the dysrhythmia present and list treatment options.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, given hemodynamic data, students will calculate desired hemodynamic indices and differentiate the shock state present.

    Pediatric Specialty Rotation

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will develop professional behaviors and attitudes that contribute to satisfactory clinical practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Consistently arrive at the clinical site at the assigned time and prepared for the day’s activities.
      1. Consistently have the following in their possession at all times:
        1. Results of personal physical examination.
        2. Verification of Hepatitis vaccine or waiver.
        3. Titers for communicable diseases or verification of recent vaccination.
        4. Result of TB skin test or chest x-ray result.
        5. BLS Healthcare Provider card.
        6. Drug cards for medications commonly used in clinical practice.
      2. Consistently demonstrate appropriate work appearance as outlined in the student handbook.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively and accurately communicate, orally and through written documentation, to patients and other members of the Health Care Team.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently demonstrate proper documentation of the intervention and the patient’s response.
    2. Given a patient interaction, demonstrate appropriate communication interpersonal skills.
    3. Given a clinical situation, indicate proper techniques to maintain privacy in the healthcare setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate assessment data and patients pathophysiology to determine a safe and appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify pathophysiological changes that are present.
    2. Given a clinical situation, consistently identify clinical signs and symptoms that are emergent in nature and recommend appropriate steps to resolve.
    3. Given a clinical situation and appropriate patient information, consistently identify the correct protocol or treatment plan to improve the patient’s cardiopulmonary status.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will develop psychomotor skills in performing capillary and arterial blood sampling, and will be able to interpret results and recommend an appropriate treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and list normal capillary/arterial blood-gas values.
    2. Observe the proper procedure for performing a capillary blood gas.
    3. Given a capillary or arterial blood gas,:
      1. Interpret the CBG/ABG.
      2. Make recommendations to treat the acid base and/or oxygenation abnormality.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will initiate, monitor and recommend an appropriate treatment plan for patients receiving ventilatory life support and be able to evaluate patient’s response.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up a mechanical ventilator for patient use.
    2. Perform a routine ventilator check, according to department policy and procedure.
    3. Calculate appropriate values used to assess the pediatric or neonatal patient during mechanical ventilation.
    4. Complete patient assessment forms as designated by the clinical instructor.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate safe administration of all respiratory therapy procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and maintain an oxygen hood.
    2. Observe endotracheal suctioning utilizing sterile technique.
    3. Demonstrate the proper procedure of bag/mask or bag/tube ventilation.
    4. Demonstrate the proper procedure for administering aerosolized medications.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate, assess and evaluate the patient’s cardiovascular status using invasive and/or noninvasive monitoring devices.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will setup and maintain a pulse oximeter.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Pediatric/Neonatal
      1. Ventilator Set up
      2. Ventilator Circuit Change
      3. Routine Ventilator Check
      4. Neonatal/Pediatric Ventilator
      5. Manual Ventilation
      6. Capillary Blood Gas
    2. Critical Care II
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Ventilator Circuit Change
      7. Routine Ventilator Check
      8. Non-Invasive Ventilation
      9. Bedside Pulmonary Function
    3. Critical Care III
      1. Arterial Blood Gas Sampling
      2. Arterial Blood Gas Analysis
      3. Ventilatory Assessment
      4. 24hour Suction Catheter
      5. Ventilator Set-Up
      6. Ventilator Circuit Change
      7. Routine Ventilator Check
      8. Non-Invasive Ventilation
      9. Tracheostomy Care
      10. Arrhythmia Recognition

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2420 - Advanced Concepts in Respiratory Care


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This forum for discussion of new and advanced applications in clinical practice covers pulmonary function testing, EKGs, myocardial infarction, chest tube drainage systems, and hemodynamic monitoring. Each student gives an oral presentation on a topic of interest in Respiratory Care. Center Campus. Winter semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2260 with grade Pass

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2335 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2350 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-2360
    Corequisite: RSPT-2431


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will perform a bedside pulmonary function test, interpret results, and evaluate the need for further assessment.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper calibration of a bedside pulmonary function device.
    2. Instruct a patient on how to perform a Forced Vital Capacity (FVC), Flow-Volume Loop (FVL), and Mandatory Volume Ventilation. (MVV)
    3. When given pulmonary function data, determine if a post-bronchodilator study is indicated and calculate the percent change between pre- and post-bronchodilator measurements.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will assess and evaluate the patient for abnormal cardiac rhythms and describe a treatment plan using ACLS algorithms.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an ECG tracing, state the dysrhythmia present.
    2. Given an ECG tracing, list the appropriate ACLS treatment options.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will correlate the information gathered during hemodynamic monitoring with the patient assessment data and incorporate this data into an effective protocol for care.

    Objectives:

    1. Given hemodynamic data, calculate desired hemodynamic indices.
    2. Given hemodynamic data, differentiate the shock state present.
    3. Identify, troubleshoot, and evaluate a pleural drainage system to effectively manage patients with a pneumothorax and/or pleural effusion.
    4. List the indications for chest tube drainage.
    5. Differentiate between the anatomic locations used for insertion of a chest tube.
    6. Differentiate between the functions of each of the bottles/chambers used in a pleural drainage system.
    7. Given a problem with a pleural drainage system, identify and troubleshoot the system.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate effective communication skills by preparing an oral class presentation, using current research data, on a topic of interest in Respiratory Care.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a topic, the student will research the topic and prepare both a written and a oral presentation on the topic as outlined by the instructor.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will discuss and evaluate management strategies used in various health care institutions.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the source of revenues within a Respiratory Care Department.
    2. Describe at least three positive and three negative personality traits and describe how to emphasize/deemphasize these during an interview.
    3. Describe the benefits for implementing Therapist Driven Protocols in a RC department.
    4. Describe the primary goals of homecare.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competenty.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Pulmonary Function Studies
      1. Spirometry
      2. Lung Volumes
      3. Diffusion Studies
      4. Bronchial Provocation
      5. Exercise Testing
      6. Metabolic Testing
      7. Pulmonary Function Equipment
      8. Quality Assurance
      9. ATS Standards
    2. Electrocardiography
      1. Cardiac Anatomy and Physiology
      2. Electrocardiogram
      3. Axis Deviation
      4. Acute Coronary Syndromes
      5. Defibrillation
      6. ACLS Protocols
    3. Hemodynamics
      1. Shock
      2. Hemodynamic Monitoring
    4. Chest Tubes
    5. Neurodiagnostics
    6. Home Care
    7. Management

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 2431 - Certification & Registry Review


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly RSPT 2430) RSPT-2431 is a comprehensive review to prepare students for the NBRC Certification and Registry Examinations. Students will become familiar with clinical simulation testing through use of computer simulations and latent imaging. NBRC Self-Assessment Examinations will be administered during this course. A program exit exam will be given at the end of the semester. Center Campus. Winter semester only.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2260 with grade Pass

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2335 with grade C or better

    Prerequisite: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy program and RSPT-2350 with grade C or better

    Corequisite: RSPT-2360
    Corequisite: RSPT-2420


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be prepared with the necessary tools, information and references needed to pass the NBRC examinations upon graduation from the respiratory therapy program.

    Objectives:

    1. Complete the instructor assigned mock exam and self-assessment assignment.
    2. Complete the at home online practice certification exam with a minimum score of 75%.
    3. Complete the instructor assigned challenge exam and the self-assessment assignment.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to complete the Therapist Multiple Choice and Clinical Simulation Self-assessment exams and design an action plan to improve examination results.

    Objectives:

    1. Complete the at home online practice Therapist Multiple Choice exam with a minimum score of 70%.
    2. Complete the Therapist Multiple Choice self-assessment exam.
    3. Complete the clinical simulation self-assessment exam.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to demonstrate proficiency in the use computer simulation self-assessment exams by obtaining a score of 80% in both the information gathering and decision making sections.

    Objectives:

    1. Complete the instructor assigned computer based simulation programs with a passing score of 80%.
    2. Complete the online instructor assigned computer simulation exams with a passing score of 80%.
    3. Complete the self-assessment computer simulation exam.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to pass the Program Exit Examination with a minimal proficiency as set by the lower cut score by the NBRC.

    Objectives:

    1. Complete the Therapist Multiple Choice self-assessment exam with a minimum score as set by the lower cut score by the NBRC.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to plan, organize, and implement a community service project to enhance academic study.

    Objectives:

    1. Select a community service project that is approved by the instructor.
    2. After completing the community service project write a one-page summary of the activity.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to develop critical problem-solving skills necessary to practice as a safe, competent respiratory care practitioner.

    Objectives:

    1. Select a problem to be solved that is clinical in nature and submit the scenario and problem statement to the instructor for approval.
    2. Investigate the problem, identify options, and operationalize his/her selected option and evaluate the outcome.
    3. Submit the completed paper to the instructor by the specified deadline.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Practice CRT Exam
    2. NBRC and Critical Thinking
    3. Patient Assessment
    4. Equipment
    5. Emergency Care
    6. Special Procedures
    7. Pulmonary Function Testing
    8. Arterial Blood Gases
    9. Assisted Ventilation
    10. Airway Care
    11. Respiratory Care Procedures
    12. Written Registry Exam
    13. Clinical Simulation Exam
    14. CRT Exit Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Secondary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Robotics

  
  • ROBO 1200 - Robot Operations, Handling Tool, & Programming


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (replaces but does not equate to ROBO-1110 & ROBO-1440 combined)
    This is an introductory course covering the tasks and procedures needed to safely setup, program, and maintain a robots with handling tool software.  It involves both classroom instruction and hands-on training. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:  The student will be able to describe robotic basics.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the components of a robot.
    2. Identify the safety zones.

    Outcome 2:  The student will be able to program a robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Program selective points into robot in various operational modes.
    2. Modify existing programs.

    Outcome 3:  The student will be able to operate a robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Execute a student program.
    2. Recover from critical and minor faults.

    Outcome 4:  The student will be able to setup a material handling robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Setup and execute tool, user, and jog frames.
    2. Store and load programs from the USB port on the teach pendant.

    Outcome 5:  The student will be able to program a material handling robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Add positional offsets to a functional program.
    2. Monitor program parameters in executed program.

    Outcome 6:  The student will be able to operate a robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Adjust program parameters as needed.
    2. Change encoder batteries.
    3. Re-master a robot.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Safely power up the robot from a complete shutdown.
    2. Manipulate the robot using the teach pendant.
    3. Set up and test robot movement parameters for a given work cell.
    4. Create and test programs for a given task.
    5. Edit programs in teach mode.
    6. Master and calibrate the robot.
    7. Review safety procedures.
    8. Power up and jog the robot.
    9. Recover from common program and robot faults.
    10. Create, modify, and execute a teach pendant.
    11. Power up and jog the robot.
    12. Recover from common program and robot faults.
    13. Execute production operations.
    14. Create, modify, and execute a material handling program.
    15. Create and execute macros.
    16. Monitor, force, and simulate input and output signals.
    17. Backup and restore individual programs and files.

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ROBO 1435 - ArcTool Robot Welding


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly ROBO-2912)
    ROBO-1435 covers the tasks and procedures students need to set up and program a FANUC Robotics ArcTool software package. Using the FANUC welding robot, students program, modify, and test a welding task. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    ATWD-1110
    ROBO-1200

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to set up a FANUC ArcTool Robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Observe safety precautions.
    2. Power up, write, execute, and jog the robot based on the written programs.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to program a FANUC ArcTool Robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the hand pendant, write a weld control program.
    2. Download the program to the controller and implement program.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to operate a FANUC ArcTool Robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Test program for desired operations.
    2. Modify program.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Safely power up the robot from a complete shutdown.
    2. Manipulate the robot using the teach pendant.
    3. Set up and test robot movement parameters for a given work cell and torch.
    4. Set up ArcTool Robot for specific weld applications.
    5. Create and test weld programs for a given weld task.
    6. Edit weld programs in teach mode.
    7. Master and calibrate the robot.
    8. Review safety practices.
    9. Power up and jog the robot.
    10. Recover from common program and robot faults.
    11. Create, modify, and execute a teach pendant.

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ROBO 2450 - Vision Robot


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    ROBO-2450 introduces the FANUC Vision system. Students will set up and calibrate a vision camera and create, test, and modify a vision-style program. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    ROBO-1200

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to set up a FANUC IR Vision Robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Power up, write, execute, and jog the robot based on the written programs.
    2. Set up communications between robot and teaching computer.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to program a FANUC IR Vision Robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Set up and calibrate the laser vision system.
    2. Teach a vision process.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to operate a FANUC IR Vision Robot.

    Objectives:

    1. Execute program operation.
    2. Modify program parameters as needed.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Safely power up the robot from a complete shutdown
    2. Manipulate the robot using the teach pendant
    3. Set up and test robot movement parameters for a given work cell and torch
    4. Set up IR Vision Robot for specific applications
    5. Create and test vision programs for a given task
    6. Edit vision programs in teach mode
    7. Master and calibrate the robot
    8. Review safety practices
    9. Power up and jog the robot
    10. Recover from common program and robot faults

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Security Administration

  
  • SECR 1000 - Introduction to Security


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    An introduction to security administration including an historical, philosophical, and legal framework for security operations, as well as detailed presentations of specific security processes and programs currently and historically utilized in providing security. An overview of the personnel, physical information process, and specialized programs for plants, retail stores, transportation systems, and security education. The total environmental, political, financial, legal ramifications of the individual in society. Center Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will know the primary security disciplines.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List and describe the eight primary security disciplines.
    2. In a small working group, prepare and orally present security countermeasures for a prepared security scenario.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will understand modern security within a historical context.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Critically compare historic and modern security countermeasures.
    2. Conduct research on a twentieth century labor or civil unrest incident or event and produce a deliverable product.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Security
    2. History of Security Concepts
    3. Security and Labor Unrest
    4. Security and Civil Unrest
    5. Ethics and Professionalism
    6. Internal and External Security Relations
    7. Security Industry Overview
    8. Personnel Security
    9. Physical Security
    10. Information Security
    11. Operations Security
    12. Industrial Security
    13. Industrial Fire Protection and Safety
    14. Security and Technology
    15. The Future of Security
    16. Final Examination

    Primary Faculty
    Sherwood, Donna
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SECR 1120 - Principles of Loss Prevention


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    An overview of the functional operations of various specialized areas of security such as theft and risk control, security surveys, and loss prevention management in proprietary and governmental institutions. Center Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, the student will know the primary elements and phases of the risk management and emergency management processes.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List and describe the five elements of risk management.
    2. Apply the risk management process in the preparation of a security survey.
    3. List and describe the phases of the emergency management process.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to conduct security research from online and print sources.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Complete a practical exercise by identifying the keyword and website search strategy.
    2. Conduct research on a loss prevention issue or topic and produce a deliverable product.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Loss Prevention
    2. Security Management
    3. Problem Analysis and Solving
    4. Security Surveys and Risk Assessment
    5. Burglary Countermeasures
    6. Workplace Violence
    7. Mapping a Loss Prevention Career
    8. Midterm Examination
    9. Homeland Security
    10. Emergency Management
    11. Retail security and Loss Prevention
    12. Logistics and Cargo Security
    13. Fraud Prevention and Identity Theft
    14. Telecommuting, Mobility, and Security
    15. Bioterrorism
    16. Private Investigation and Consulting
    17. Final Examination

    Primary Faculty
    Sherwood, Donna
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Sign Language

  
  • SIGN 1010 - American Sign Language 1


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    SIGN-1010 is designed for students who have no previous American Sign Language (ASL) training. Students achieve a basic level of expressive and receptive sign communication skills in American Sign Language, and will understand the role of ASL in deaf persons’ lives. This course focuses on vocabulary, grammar, language functions, and other deafness-related issues.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in basic sign language skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Engage in one-to-one conversation and share basic information.
    2. Ask for and provide basic and personal factual information.
    3. Inquire about and express simple preferences and opinions.
    4. Give and follow simple directions, commands, and requests.
    5. Exchange greetings introducing basic personal information.
    6. Discuss the immediate environment.
    7. Demonstrate ability to use and recognize appropriate listener feedback during one-to-one conversation (e.g. head nod, head shake).
      1. Feelings and emotions.
      2. Factual information (names, schools, background information).
      3. Preferences and Opinions (e.g. favorite people, colors, food).
      4. Follow commands (e.g. ask for permission).
      5. Maintain and change interpersonal Relationships (e.g. name, age, education).
      6. Knowledge of the world (aesthetic design of classroom).
      7. Personal enjoyment (e.g. participate in activities).
      8. Topics including famous deaf people, recreation and daily routines.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use American Sign Language vocabulary.

    Objectives:
    Regarding such topics as small talk, numbers and class room expressions, personal characteristics, hobbies, housing & furnishings, family members, calendar, time, and entertainment.

    1. Demonstrate comprehension of basic information by responding appropriately. (e.g., name, age, family).
    2. Demonstrate comprehension of basic ASL syntax (e.g., OSV, Rhetorical, topics/comment).
    3. Follow simple commands (e.g. put papers away).
    4. Demonstrate finger spelled word recognition by correctly reading.
    5. Proper names finger spelled (e.g. brands, names, places).
    6. Comprehend main ideas in ASL narratives and stories.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic ASL syntax while signing.

    Objectives:

    1. Use Phonology, parameters (hand shapes Palm orientations, locations and movements.
    2. Morphology, inflections, manners, modulations, and time aspects.
    3. Morphology, Non Manual markers.
    4. Timeline and Time
    5. Temporal Aspects (observe the rules by beginning with time indicator).
    6. Incorporation of Numbers.
    7. Verb Inflections.
    8. Plurality.
    9. Syntax, Questions, Yes/No, Wh).
    10. Syntax Sentence Types (Topic Statement, Conditionals, and Commands).
    11. Syntax Negation and Assertion.
    12. Discourse Register.
    13. Real World Orientation and Spatial Relationships, Absence, and Presence.
    14. Classifiers, Descriptions, locations, shape specifies, entity, and rules.
    15. Noun and verb types.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Deaf Culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and use cultural aspects of American Sign Language.
    2. Getting a deaf person attention appropriately.
    3. Negotiating a sign environment appropriately.
    4. Maintaining sightline when communicating in sign.
    5. Demonstrate basic familiarity with literature about Deaf people, history and Deaf-related events.
    6. Recognize themes, ideas or perspectives of Deaf Culture and how they are reflected by the culture.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Introduction

    1. Greetings
    2. Numbers
    3. Useful expressions

    Getting to Know You

    1. Ask/give names
    2. Wh-questions
    3. Number forms
    4. Contrastive structures
    5. Identifying others
    6. Following instructions/commands

    Exchange of Personal Information

    1. Yes/No questions
    2. Real world orientation
    3. Number form and movement
    4. Fingerspelling up letters
    5. Narrating experience with language
    6. Discuss leisure activities
    7. Describe shapes
    8. Identify sequence - gender - appearance
    9. Gender body position
    10. Gender and action - contrastive
    11. Form and movement of double letters

    Discuss Living Situation

    1. Ask/Tell where one lives
    2. Give commands location
    3. Weak hand to establish reference point
    4. Communicating with the face
    5. Fingerspelling hand positions and movement
    6. Discussing one’s residence
    7. Cardinal numbers 30 - 66
    8. Talking about roommate/pets
    9. Giving basic directions
    10. Fingerspelling down letters
    11. Traveling

    Talk About Family

    1. Talk about immediate family
    2. Negation
    3. Rocking numbers
    4. Express desires
    5. Talk about siblings
    6. Tell how old
    7. Talk about extended family
    8. How family members relate
    9. Family Variations
    10. Cardinal Numbers 1 - 100
    11. Getting meaning across
    12. Commenting on Family members

    Primary Faculty
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SIGN 1020 - American Sign Language 2


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    SIGN-1020 will strengthen and expand on the skills mastered in SIGN-1010. It expands upon expressive and receptive sign vocabulary. Topics include new language functions to help students expand their conversational range from talking about themselves to talking about other people and activities, to giving directions, and making requests.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SIGN-1010 or pass competency exam

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in American Sign Language beyond Elementary Sign 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Converse in small groups with teacher and classmates.
    2. Inquire about and share personal reactions.
    3. Share more factual information on topics related to people, places and things.
    4. Discuss and share thoughts and ideas with others on likes and dislikes.
    5. Negotiate directions, requests, and demands.
    6. Initiate and participate in casual exchanges with classmates (e.g., discuss past or future personal actions, make suggestions, offer advice.)
    7. Ask and respond to questions to gain knowledge and clarify understanding.
      1. Going to the grocery store, purchase of items.
      2. Factual information related to people places and things.
      3. Preferences and opinions on school subjects, books and movies.
      4. Request (e.g., explain or clarify, accept or decline invitations).
      5. Maintain and change (e.g., discuss past or future personal actions).
      6. Knowledge of world (e.g., how the earth revolves around the sun).

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use American Sign Language vocabulary related to:

    Objectives:

    1. Respond using topic/comment structure.
    2. Follow simple directions (e.g., right, left, north , south).
    3. Demonstrate comprehension of variety of unfamiliar topics.
    4. Demonstrate comprehension of basic ASL syntax.
    5. Demonstrate comprehension of basic descriptions, physical attributes.
    6. Demonstrate fingerspelled word recognition for proper nouns.
    7. Understand main ideas or themes from video presentations in ASL.
    8. Identify the principal characters and/or events and details in ASL.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond Elementary ASL 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Wh-questions DO++, WHEN, word order with time sign.
    2. Use agreement with verb in role shift.
    3. Use POSS DUTY agreement with person’s location.
    4. Time Signs and parts of day.
    5. One person and two person role shift with eye gaze.
    6. Transitions use of signing space.
    7. Descriptive classifiers.
    8. Spatial agreement - map orientation.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discus aspects of deaf culture beyond elementary ASL 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate principles of appropriate cultural norms in formal and informal settings.
    2. Participate in appropriate cultural activities.
    3. Identify and describe simple cultural based behavior patterns of deaf people.
    4. Examine expected social behaviors when interacting with mixed groups of deaf and hearing individuals at Deaf events.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Talking about Activities

    1. Ask tell when someone did/will do activity
    2. Agreement verbs
    3. Ask if tasks are completed
    4. Tell how often one does a specific chore
    5. Talk about sequence of activities involving time
    6. Tell what a person does for living

    Storytelling

    1. Understand and retell story
    2. Use of Eye contact to engage audience
    3. Practice one and two person role shifts
    4. Practice the directions of the characters enters and exits the story
    5. Manipulating the sign or classifier in the story
    6. Facial expressions to show attitude or reactions

    Giving Directions

    1. Asking/tell where
    2. Explaining the need
    3. Interrupting conversations
    4. Confirming RIGHT
    5. Expressing uncertainty

    Describing others

    1. Identifying present
    2. Wh-questions: WHO
    3. Confirming THAT-One
    4. Contrastive Structure
    5. Correcting: Wave-no

    Making Request

    1. Giving locations - spatial verbs
    2. Giving commands - inflecting verbs
    3. Offering assistance - spatial referencing
    4. Accepting/declining offer - role shifting
    5. Ask for clarification

    Primary Faculty
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SIGN 1030 - American Sign Language 3


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    SIGN-1030 students will strengthen and master the skills obtained in SIGN-1010 and SIGN-1020. They will enhance their expressive and receptive skills and vocabulary. The course emphasizes locating and describing objects, solutions to everyday problems, life events, weekend activities, and correcting and confirming information. Topics also include appropriate cultural behaviors and strategies for controlling conversations.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SIGN-1010 or SIGN-1020 or pass competency exam

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in sign language skills beyond the intermediate level of ASL 1 and 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Engage in group conversation and exchange information and opinions on a variety of topics.
    2. Compare the expression of emotions and feelings in a variety of informal and formal situations (e.g., going to a Deaf Club, attending a Deaf Play).
    3. Discuss Facts about events that happened in the past.
    4. Inquire about and express satisfaction or dissatisfaction, interest or lack of interest, and discuss probability and certainty (e.g., hobbies, activities, current events).
    5. Make and respond to suggestions or requests in formal situations.
    6. Respond to a variety of situations ( e.g. congratulations, compliments, sympathy, regret).
    7. Explore and discuss the mean of what is being done.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use American Sign Language vocabulary related to:

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate comprehension of short narratives by retelling (e.g. Deaf Fables, short stories).
    2. Follow complex directions.
    3. Demonstrate comprehension of complex questions, including conditional questions.
    4. Demonstrate comprehension of complex ASL syntax by spontaneously using more complex syntax.
    5. Demonstrate comprehension of more complex descriptions of tings by asking questions about these topics.
    6. Demonstrate fingerspelled word recognition
    7. Demonstrate an understanding of main ideas.
    8. Demonstrate the ability to recognize levels of register and understand their significance.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond the intermediate level ASL 1 and 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the ASL parameters in all areas such as handshapes, palm orientations, locations, and movements (e.g. Headache, hurt).
    2. Identify how a variety of degrees can change inflections (e.g. Beautiful-really, Beautiful - not really).
    3. Use of complex non-manual markers in ASL dialogues ( (e.g. Cha, cs, cond, intense, mm, neg, nod, pah, pow, puffed cheeks, pursed lips, questions, relative clauses, rhetorical questions, sta, t, th, tight lips).
    4. Use of incorporation of number and appropriate passive hand as reference point.
    5. Use of “regular” inflection.
    6. Use numeral handshapes with location, movement and orientation of signs in money.
    7. Use of reflect and use plural verbs that are often in agreement with plural nouns.
    8. Use conditionals with the ending in either a sentence or question.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Deaf Culture beyond ASL 1 and 2.

    Objectives:
    Students will learn about many varied products of Deaf Culture, such as ASL poetry, ASL narrations, art made by Deaf people, and videos of ASL literature.

    1. Analyze the contributions of Deaf Scientist and scholars to science, medicine, astronomy, mathematics, etc.
    2. Analyze and reflect on expressive products of Deaf Culture, such as stories, poetry, literature and explore the ways in which these products represent the lifestyles and perspectives of Deaf people.
    3. Demonstrate awareness of Deaf heritage and identify major historical events.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Talking about Family and Occupations

    1. Explaining relationships - possessive pronouns
    2. Asking/Telling how long
    3. Asking/Telling how old
    4. Wh-questions: HOW OLD
    5. Listing principle, ranking family members
    6. Dual personal pronouns
    7. Age numbers

    Attributing Qualities to others

    1. Contradicting opinions: BUT
    2. One - character role shifting
    3. Contrastive structure

    Talking About Routines

    1. Solving conflicts
    2. Telling what Time
    3. Temporal sequencing
    4. Time signs: frequency
    5. Clock numbers
    6. Wh-questions: WHEN

    Locating things around the House

    1. Give reason - topic comment structure
    2. Make request ? weak hand as reference
    3. Ask where - locative classifiers
    4. Give specific locations - Yes/no questions
    5. Correct and confirm information
    6. Open conversations

    Primary Faculty
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SIGN 1040 - Fingerspelling


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    SIGN-1040 covers the manual alphabet for students who have experience in fingerspelling or dactylology. Students will learn to sign the alphabet and achieve a basic understanding of the role fingerspelling has in American Sign Language communication. The course functions primarily with the American manual alphabet and highlights phonetical fingerspelling, syllabication and other deafness-related issues.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SIGN-1010

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in using the manual alphabet beyond the elementary ASL 1 level.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand the rules and hand shape movements when using specific letters in the manual alphabet.
      1. Up letters.
      2. Down letters.
      3. Double letters.
      4. Moving letter Z (Beginning, Middle and End).
      5. Moving Letter J.
      6. Letter G and H.
    2. Understand the use of Loan Signs or citation fingerspelled words.
      1. Deletion.
      2. Location.
      3. Handshapes.
      4. Movement.
      5. Orientation.
      6. Reduplication.
      7. Second Hand.
      8. Morphological Involvement.
      9. Semantics.
    3. Understand use of phonetic combination.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use ASL manual alphabet related to:

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate fingerspelled word recognition for proper nouns and lexicalized fingerspelling in one to one scenarios, in groups, and in videotaped format (e.g. products, brands, names, places, words that have no signs.).
    2. Demonstrate the use of fingerspelled words in combination non-manual markers.
    3. Demonstrate the use of fingerspelled words with appropriate speed, pauses, location, palm orientation, correct spelling, movement, and eye gaze.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond elementary ASL l.

    Objectives:

    1. Use appropriate handshapes.
    2. Use appropriate movement with meanings.
    3. Use appropriate Palm Orientation.
    4. Use appropriate speed, location, and pauses for words.
    5. Use appropriate Loan signs.
    6. Use correct spelling of words.
    7. Use appropriate Topic Markers (negation, assertions).
    8. Use appropriate descriptive Adjectives (e.g., cha, puff cheeks, intense, pursed lips).

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Deaf Culture and the use of fingerspelling.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and learn about expressive products of Deaf Culture, such as ABC stories, poetry, literature and explore the ways in which these products reflect the lifestyles, and perspectives of Deaf people.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Fingerspelling rules
    2. Word of Trade
    3. Business Cards

    Primary Faculty
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SIGN 2010 - American Sign Language 4


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    SIGN-2010 students will strengthen and master the skills obtained in SIGN-1010, 1020, and 1030 towards mastering ASL at an intermediate level. They will enhance expressive and receptive skills and vocabulary. This course is structured into logical grammatical units such as sentence types, pronominalization and classifiers. Highlighted topics include sociological aspects of deafness, hearing loss, medical and audiological perspectives and ASL compared to English.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SIGN-1030 or pass competency exam

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in American Sign Language skills beyond level 1, 2, and 3.

    Objectives:

    1. Debate and exchange information and opinions on topics of students’ choosing in one-to-one and group settings both inside and outside of classroom.
    2. Explore, analyze and discuss controversial emotions and feelings on a variety of topics (e.g., audism issues).
    3. Share and analyze factual information on variety of topics.
    4. Debate and support personal and others’ opinions and preferences on variety of topics.
    5. Give and follow complex sequence of instructions.
    6. Initiate and participate in Social exchanges in formal situations. (E.g. Deaf visitors to the class, Deaf play, etc.).

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use American Sign Language vocabulary as related to:

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate comprehension of more complex narratives including various types of grammatical structures, including topic shift and role shift, by retelling the selection. (E.g. Birds of a Different Feather, etc.).
    2. Make and follow request. (e.g., invitations to classmates, request a travel itinerary).
    3. Demonstrate comprehension of complex questions, including conditional questions, on a variety of unfamiliar topics by seeking clarification and responding appropriately.
    4. Use complex ASL syntax in a paragraph. (e.g., temporal aspects, pronominalization.
    5. Demonstrate comprehension of complex descriptions of things by asking questions about these subjects and by asking for clarification.
    6. Demonstrate fingerspelled word recognition of proper nouns and lexicalized fingerspelling in videotaped format.
    7. Demonstrate understanding of major topics, and themes.
    8. Demonstrate the ability to analyze variety of sign styles through live and recorded materials and understand their significance.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond ASL 1, 2, and 3.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze and discuss the meanings of ASL parameters.
    2. Use inflections and change the meanings in the areas of manners, modulations, degrees, and temporal aspects.
    3. Give presentations using increasingly more complex non-manual markers in ASL dialogues.
    4. Use regularity, approximate/relative time, repetition, and durations and tense.
    5. Use numeral handshape with location, movement, and orientation of signs in ranking, order of finishing in competition, placement of number identification on uniforms, and teams scores.
    6. Use plural classifiers by making “in row”, “sweep in a row” in “row” and “sweep in rows” inflections.
    7. Use rhetorical questions.
    8. Use real world orientation effectively be changing the perspectives of the signer in ASK dialogues.
    9. Use all compounds and contractions in all ASL dialogues.
    10. Use sign variations (e.g., some slang signs may be appropriate for some Deaf members).

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Deaf Culture beyond ASL 1, 2, and 3.

    Objectives:
    As the students expand their knowledge of Deaf Culture, they will discover that certain perspectives, practices and products differ from other cultures in the United States.

    1. Exchange information and opinions comparing Deaf culture with one’s own culture.
    2. Understand the value and role of collectivism in Deaf Culture and contrast it with own culture.
    3. Investigate the unwritten rules present in society that impact perceptions of Deaf People and Deaf Culture.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Complaining, Making Suggestions and Requests

    1. Complain about others - recurring time signs
    2. Make suggestions - Continuous time signs
    3. Make request - temporal aspects
    4. Ask Permission - inflecting verbs
    5. Express concern - role shifting
    6. Decline, explain why conditional sentences

    Exchange personal information: Life Events

    1. Ask/tell when - when clauses
    2. Tell about life events - Phrasing for sequencing
    3. Ask nationality of name - contrastive structure
    4. Narrate family immigration - possessive forms
    5. Correct and elaborate - descriptive and locative classifiers

    Describing and Identifying Things

    1. Ask what a word means - descriptive classifier
    2. Give Definition
    3. Describe Objects
    4. Instrument Classifiers
    5. Topic comment structure
    6. Non-manual markers
    7. Money numbers

    Talking about the Weekend

    1. Ask about the weekend - temporal sequencing
    2. Describe weekend activities - time signs with durative
    3. Express opinions/feelings - element classifiers
    4. Tell about disruptive plans

    Primary Faculty
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SIGN 2030 - American Deaf Culture


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    SIGN-2030 enables students to recognize and explain the external ramifications of hearing loss. It deals with the characteristics of sociological subculture among the hearing impaired (both deaf and hard of hearing) individuals as it relates to cultural aspects of deafness.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course students will know the various aspects of Deaf History and Deaf Culture, including description of deafness, deaf community as defined by audiology and/or cultural means, and culture as reflected in arts and language of deaf people.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop an understanding of the Deaf Community through its historical heritage.
    2. Role of American Sign Language in Deaf Culture.
    3. History of Deaf America.
    4. Deaf folklore, Deaf Literature and Deaf Humor.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course students will recognize and explain various aspects of the deaf community.

    Objectives:

    1. Familiar with the social interactions and group norms.
    2. Deaf identity and diversity.
    3. Deafblind.
    4. Cochlear implant vs. Deaf Culture.
    5. Deaf Family - Hearing Family.
    6. Learn the various forms of communication used by the Deaf.
    7. The paradigm shift in perspectives about Deaf people and Deaf education.
    8. The definition of culture and the distinction between American Deaf Culture and mainstream culture.
    9. Deafhood.
    10. Communication Technology -Vlogs.
    11. Impact of deafness on mental health.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, student will recognize and discuss aspects of Deaf Culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Getting Attention behaviors that are culturally appropriate.
    2. Negotiating a Signing Environment in culturally appropriate manner.
    3. Conversation strategies.
    4. Meeting others how information is exchanged.
    5. Name signs.
    6. How do Deaf People know when baby is crying, wake up in the morning, drive, understand TV, and use the phone.
    7. Beware of life experiences of Deaf individuals.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Deaf culture
    2. Deaf culture - perspectives on Deaf culture
    3. History of Deaf America
    4. Deaf Family - Hearing Family
    5. Deaf Education
    6. Sound and Fury (Part 1, 2, and 3)
    7. Hearing Loss and Identity
    8. Communication - Technology
    9. Mental Health and the Deaf
    10. Deaf Blind
    11. Deaf Humor, Deaf Folklore and Dear Literature
    12. CODA (Children of Deaf Adults)
    13. Through Deaf Eyes

    Primary Faculty
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Sociology

  
  • SOCY 1010 - Principles of Sociology


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    The student will study the origin, development, organization and function of human societies. Emphasis will be on culture, socialization, group behavior, social stratification, and social change.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the four sociological paradigms of how society operates and the theoretical approaches.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the structural functional paradigm.
    2. Describe the social conflict paradigm.
    3. Describe the symbolic interactionist paradigm.
    4. Describe the feminist paradigm.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an application of the use of the scientific method to gain knowledge about behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. List the differences between sociology and assumptions and myths about societal issues.
    2. Define the scientific method.
    3. List the steps of the research model.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the social structures of society.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify systems of social structure.
    2. Explain social class and lifestyle choices.
    3. Explain racial and ethnic inequality.
    4. Explain forms of gender inequality.
    5. Explain implications of aging around the world.
    6. Explain groups and organizations on a micro and macro level.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe sociologically concepts such as culture, social structure and socialization.

    Objectives:

    1. Define culture.
    2. Describe the relationship between culture and societal behavior.
    3. List the components of social structure.
    4. Explain the nature vs. nurture debate.
    5. Identify premodern and postmodern societies.
    6. Explain socialization through the life course.
    7. Explain social interaction in time and space.
    8. Identify types of groups and their characteristics.
    9. Identify types of leadership.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe an overall knowledge of how agents of socialization direct behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain systems of healthcare.
    2. Explain the functions of education.
    3. Explain the significance of the mass media.
    4. Explain the various family systems.
    5. Explain globalization.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Sociological Perspective
    2. Race and Ethnicity
    3. Research Methods
    4. Social Stratification
    5. Culture and Social Interaction
    6. Gender
    7. Organizations
    8. Aging
    9. Socialization
    10. Marriage and Family
    11. Deviance
    12. Education
    13. Sexuality
    14. Health and Medicine

    Primary Faculty
    Zaranek, Rochelle
    Secondary Faculty
    Kingry, Bryan
    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 1100 - Modern Social Problems


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    A sociological analysis of some of the major social problems confronting American society. Emphasis is placed on the relationship between social problems and value conflicts, social deviation, and social change.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize three major theoretical perspectives in sociology and its own notion of the causes, consequences, and solutions of social problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the fundamentalist perspective in terms of causes, consequences, and solutions of social problems.
    2. Utilize the conflict perspective in terms of causes, consequences, and solutions of social problems.
    3. Utilize the interactionist perspective in terms of causes, consequences, and solutions of social problems.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize how the social context influences our attitudes and behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Gather data.
    2. Explain the difference between facts and opinion.
    3. Explain objectivity and subjectivity.
    4. Explain manifest functions and latent functions within the social world.
    5. List the steps of the basic research model.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the influences of globalization in shaping reality.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the micro level social issues as it applies to the individual.
    2. Explain the macro level of reality at group levels.
    3. Explain the meso level of various societies..
      1. Northern Europe
      2. Middle East
      3. Central America
      4. South America

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Sociological Perspectives
    2. Research Methodology
    3. Mental Illness
    4. Drugs and Alcohol
    5. Crime and Deviance
    6. Poverty and Affluence
    7. Racism
    8. Gender
    9. Family
    10. Work
    11. Urban Population
    12. Technology
    13. Terrorism and War
    14. Globalization

    Primary Faculty
    Kingry, Bryan
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 1210 - Introduction to Social Work


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    SOCY-1210 is an introductory behavioral science course that covers the historical, theoretical, and methodological systems that produced social welfare services and the social work profession. Students will participate in Service Learning during class time.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course students will be able to trace the history, theory, values, and ethics of the social work system.

    Objectives:

    1. Distinguish between social welfare, public welfare, and the social work profession.
    2. Identify and list the principles of case work management.
    3. Discuss the Generalist Approach and Systems Theory within individuals, groups, and the community.
    4. Identify and define different theories and approaches that social workers utilize.
    5. Identify and discuss the (National Association of Social Workers (NASW) Code of Ethics.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to identify and discuss the services social workers provide to individuals, groups, and the community.

    Objectives:

    1. List the steps involved when initiating the planned change in social work.
    2. Identify the tasks of the social worker during the interview process.
    3. List the pros and cons of the assessment and the school of casework practice.
    4. Discuss social work with groups, utilizing the variety of social work models.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to identify and discuss the role of social work values and the profession within the community as well as within the public and private sectors.

    Objectives:

    1. Characterize pubic agencies and discuss the role of social work in the agencies.
    2. Characterize voluntary agency and discuss the role of social work.
    3. Discuss social services in the nonsocial work setting(s).
    4. Explain the history of social work in the community.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to identify areas of social work concern in the United States and globally.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss direct practice with minorities and special populations.
    2. Discuss indirect practice with minorities and special populations.
    3. Explain social work practice on a global perspective.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of the course students will be able to identify the broad areas of social service resources, participation, guidelines, criteria, and methods of classification.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the differences between profit and nonprofit agencies.
    2. Discuss the differences between public and private medical insurance policies and coverage.
    3. Identify resources available within the community and guidelines that apply to receiving assistance.
    4. Discuss the role of the state and federal government when accessing resources.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of the course students will be able to recognize their own values, beliefs, and own personal bias about human diversity as they relate to one’s culture, class, and lifestyle choices in others in relation to general practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Explore cultural differences and ethnocentrism.
    2. Discuss the differences between prejudice, discrimination, and racism.
    3. Identify different lifestyle choices in order to effectively assist populations in need.
    4. Develop and implement treatment plans.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of the course students will be able to identify and discuss different groups, issues, and social problems at the center of social work practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify with problems in aging.
    2. Discuss problems in mental health.
    3. Discuss problems in substances abuse.
    4. Identify challenges in the education and employment institutions.
    5. Identify challenges in the health care industry.
    6. Identify challenges within the criminal justice system.
    7. Identify the challenges with public policies and procedures in social work.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of the course students will arrive at a fit between the student and career.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify a pathway for student interest and educational focus.
    2. Identify a service learning or field placement in which to fulfill contact hours related to the students’ area of interest in social work.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Course Overview
    2. The Generalist Approach and Theories in Social Work
    3. The Emergence of Social Work as a Profession
    4. Social Work Practice and Social Systems
    5. The Social Service Delivery System
    6. Social Work Values and Ethics
    7. Social Work and Social Justice
    8. Diversity and Social Work
    9. Social Policies and Social Work
    10. Social Work in Health and Mental Health
    11. Social Work with Families and Youth
    12. Social Work with Aging and Special Populations

    Primary Faculty
    Zaranek, Rochelle
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 2000 - Sociology of Health & Human Behavior


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    A survey of the field of health and human behavior from a sociological perspective. The course will explore the relationship between health and human development, the structure and function of health institutions, public health, and health education, the variety of roles of health practitioners, and the patterns of health care in American society.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize the interaction between society and health, including the social factors that contribute to illness.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the connection between social class and heart disease.
    2. Explain the difference between illness and disease.
    3. Identify critical social factors that prevent illness.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize the sociological perspective within health professions, health care institutions, as well as professional roles and ideologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the manner in which the medical profession became a model of professionalization.
    2. Describe the professional status of physicians today.
    3. Identify major aspects of the past that have carried over to shape hospital today.
    4. Explain the hospital patient role.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe health systems within a global context.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe and categorize four systems of health care that exist globally.
    2. List five characteristics of each system.
    3. List countries that have implemented the system.
    4. Compare and contrast each system.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe forces within the health care field and society leading to increased government participation in the delivery of health care.

    Objectives:

    1. List and explain types of government intervention.
    2. Describe loss of autonomy among doctors.
    3. Discuss hospital flow charts.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate overall knowledge of healing options or alternative care.

    Objectives:

    1. List types of alternative healers and alternative medicine.
    2. Explain chiropractors, folk healers, and faith healers.
    3. Explain acupressure, aromatic oils, diet supplements.
    4. Explain medical treatment as being compatible with beliefs of various cultures.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Medicine and Sociology
      1. Lifestyle problems and how the Medical Model views these problems as an illness.
        1. Social class health and illness
        2. Medical ghettos
        3. Social aspects of eating disorders
        4. Alcoholism ‐ disease model vs. social factors
    2. Epidemiology
      1. AIDS ‐ the impending quarantine ‐ video
      2. Complexity of modern ills
        1. Exercise and health
        2. Heart disease
      3. HME perspective
        1. Epidemiology of hypertension
    3. Social Demography of Health
      1. Gender differences
        1. Depression
        2. Suicide
        3. Mental illness
      2. Therapy ‐ Sexist or fair? Psychoanalytic therapy
      3. Why do women live longer than men?
      4. Social class and mental disorder
    4. Physicians, Patients, and Medical Care Illness Behavior
      1. Talcott Parsons sick role
        1. Illness as a deviance
        2. Critique of the sick role
        3. Factors affecting decision to seek the sick status
      2. Labeling theory
        1. Critique of labeling theory
      3. Health belief model
        1. Help seeking
        2. Responses
    5. Medical Socialization and the Medical Profession
      1. Medical school experience
      2. Power relationships
      3. Authority
      4. Oral presentation
    6. Social Control over the Medical Profession
      1. License to err 7‐part series written by Dolly Katz
    7. Health Occupations
      1. Chiropractors
      2. Pharmacists
      3. Optometrists
      4. Osteopaths
      5. Nurses
    8. The Hospital
      1. Forms of hospitals
        1. General hospitals
        2. Specialty hospitals
        3. Hospital as a large‐scale organization
    9. Health Policy in Selected Countries
      1. Sweden
      2. Russia
      3. Great Britain
      4. Japan
      5. Borderline medicine Canada (video)
    10. Special Issues
      1. Mental illness
      2. Factors in mental illness
        1. Social class
        2. Child rearing patterns (video ‐ Child of Rage)
        3. Homosexuality
    11. Biomedical Innovation
      1. Life support system
      2. Concepts of death
      3. Organ transplants
    12. Health Care in the U.S
      1. Six myths of American medical care
      2. Fee for service system
      3. DRGs (Diagnosis‐Relate d Groups)

    Primary Faculty
    Kingry, Bryan
    Secondary Faculty
    Zaranek, Rochelle
    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 2121 - Sociology of Aging


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly SOCY-2911) SOCY-2121 provides an introduction to various areas included in the study of aging. Topics covered include the impact of changing demographics; stereotypes; theories of aging; and physical, mental, and social processes of growing old.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course students will be able to define the segment of the population considered aged and why that segment requires special study.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the demographic profile of older Americans.
    2. Identify the number and proportion of older adults.
    3. Explain health, education and economic status of the elderly population.
    4. Discuss definitions of aging.
    5. Identify stereotypes associated with aging.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to discuss the relevant theories of aging.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify theoretical perspectives of aging.
    2. Explain critical role of aging research and development of policies.
    3. Identify basic terms and concepts in aging.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to demonstrate knowledge about current data concerning processes associated with historical, cultural, biological, psychological, and sociological contexts of aging.

    Objectives:

    1. Calculate life expectancy based on health factors.
    2. Discuss social factors or aging.
    3. Discuss health care coverage.
    4. Identify changes in daily living among age cohorts.
    5. Identify activities of daily living.
    6. Discuss retirement and financial planning.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to identify behaviors considered to be maladaptive in old age and the role of situational and environmental factors in producing such behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. List positive and negative aspects of social relationships.
    2. Discuss social ties in older adulthood.
    3. Explain rate of mental disorders among older adults.
    4. Identify therapeutic interventions with older adults.
      1. Behavior interventions.
      2. Environmental design.
      3. Social networking.
      4. Family therapy.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of the course students will be able to identify role changes and challenges associated with growing old.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify median age of retirement.
    2. Discuss “age‐differentiated” social structure of present day American society.
    3. Explain job performance among older adults.
    4. Discuss effects of retirement.
    5. Explain age‐segregated living arrangements.
    6. Explain broad care homes, assisted living facilities, and care giving options.
    7. Explain the bereavement process.
    8. Compare widows and widowers.
    9. Discuss and define hospice and euthanasia.
    10. Discuss Medicare and social security.
    11. Explain advance directives

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Growth of Social Gerontology
    2. Historical and Cross‐Cultural Issues in Aging
    3. The Social Consequences of Physical Aging
    4. Managing Chronic Diseases and Promoting Well‐Being in Old Age
    5. Cognitive Changes with Aging
    6. Personality and Mental Health in Old Age
    7. Love, Intimacy, and Sexuality in Old Age
    8. Social Theories of Aging
    9. The Importance of Social Supports: Family, Friends, and Neighbors
    10. Opportunities and Stresses of Informal Caregiving
    11. Living Arrangements and Social Interactions
    12. Productive Aging: Paid and Nonpaid Roles and Activities
    13. Death, Dying, Bereavement, and Widowhood
    14. The Resiliency of Elders of Older Adults
    15. Social Policies to Address Social Problems in Aging
    16. Health and Long‐Term Care Policy and Programs

    Primary Faculty
    Zaranek, Rochelle
    Secondary Faculty
    Dyer, Brigit
    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 2450 - Marriage & the Family


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    A sociological analysis of the institutional aspects of marriage and family living, including: a comparative and historical treatment of the family; an investigation of the changes in the contemporary American family structure, functions, and roles, a discussion of contemporary family problems.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an overall knowledge of key sociological concepts utilized in the study of Marriage and Family.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the structural functional theory, explain the relationship between family and larger society.
    2. Using the ecological theory, explain the relationship and adaptation of families to their physical environment.
    3. Using the conflict perspective, discuss widespread family problems.
    4. Using feminist theories, explain sex and gender as socially constructed categories that include gender roles (how one should behave) within families.
    5. Using the symbolic interactionist perspective, explain interpersonal meanings and the way we interact within families.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an overall knowledge of the scientific method.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the scientific method.
    2. List the steps of the research model.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an overall knowledge of the use of interpersonal skills and conflict resolution.

    Objectives:

    1. List communication goals.
    2. Identify and explain sex differences in communication.
    3. Describe / list communication problems.
    4. Explain what couples fight about.
    5. List productive communication patterns.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an overall knowledge of the structure and function of the family in a variety of cultures.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the structure of African‐American families.
      1. Explain the impact of the economy.
      2. Discuss intergenerational families.
      3. Identify the impact of health.
    2. Explain the structure of Native American families.
      1. Explain the impact of the economy.
      2. Discuss intergenerational families.
      3. Identify the impact of health.
    3. Explain the structure of La៝tino families.
      1. Explain the impact of the economy.
      2. Discuss intergenera៝tional families.
      3. Iden៝tify the impact of health.
    4. Explain the structure of Asian‐American families.
      1. Explain the impact of the economy.
      2. Discuss intergenera៝tional families.
      3. Iden៝tify the impact of health.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon comple៝tion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an overall knowledge of changing parental roles.

    Objectives:

    1. Iden៝tify ho w infants affect parents.
    2. List contemporary paren៝ting roles.
    3. List eight paren៝ting styles.
    4. List the factors of children at risk.
    5. Explain the intersec៝tion of social class and paren៝ting approaches.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Intimate Relationships Past and Present
    2. Roles for Men and Women
    3. Sexual Intimacy
    4. Birth Control
    5. Achieving a Healthy Marriage
    6. Communication
    7. Decisions about Children
    8. Parenting
    9. Marital Dissolution
    10. Single Parents
    11. Marriage and Family in Later Years

    Primary Faculty
    Kingry, Bryan
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 2500 - Community Leadership Practicum


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (replaces but does not equate to POLS-2000) This course will involve volunteer/internship hours, organized with the student(s), instructor, and community partner(s). Students will participate in weekly or biweekly meetings with the instructor, and keep a reflective journal throughout the process. This course will be available only to students who are in the certificate program, and have successfully completed POLS 1500, POLS 1700, and SOCY 1210.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: POLS-1500 Prerequisite: POLS-1700 Prerequisite: SOCY-1210

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Students will analyze the mission, vision, policies, and service context of a community organization.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the mission and goals of the organization, and how they are reflected in the organization’s work.
    2. Analyze and identify the issues, policies, and culture related to the organization’s specific work and goals.
    3. Observe and reflect on the organization’s work and interaction with the community it serves.

    Outcome 2: Students will identify and examine the issues, policies and service context learned in coursework and apply them to them to the internship experience.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the leadership and organizing practices and models used by the organization.
    2. Explain how the group is organized, including roles, responsibilities, and leadership structure.
    3. Practice leadership and organizing roles and strategies within the organization (under the guidance/direction of the organization’s leadership).

    Outcome 3: Students will be able to formulate a reflection and analysis of organizing and leadership within a local community organization.

    Objectives:

    1. Document the student’s off-campus work and experience during the semester.
    2. Analyze student work experience in the context of program goals and materials.
    3. Evaluate the student’s own development in the field related to program work and materials.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Content to be determined based on arrangement with organization, student, and faculty.
    Student and organization will be provided with guidelines and obligations that will be adhered to by the student and organization.
    Primary Faculty
    Zaranek, Rochelle
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SOCY 2550 - Race & Ethnic Relations


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    SOCY-2550 introduces students to the status of racial and ethnic minorities in the United States with particular reference to the social dynamics involved with regard to majority-minority relations. Emphasis is on the culture, social organization and status, and the problems and opportunities of various ethnic groups. Topics covered include inequality, segregation, pluralism, the nature and causes of prejudice and discrimination, and the impact that such patterns have on American life.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course, students will be able to demonstrate an introductory knowledge of key concepts in cultural diversity in the study of Race and Ethnic Relations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the factors that determine dominant and subordinate group and list and define the four types of subordinate groups.
    2. Explain the complexity and the social importance of race and describe/explain how race is socially constructed.
    3. Explain the sociological perspectives regarding intergroup relations and explain the processes that create dominant/subordinate groups.
    4. Identify the impact of globalization on race and ethnic relations.
    5. Define race and ethnicity, and identify their similarities and differences.
    6. Demonstrate application of the conflict perspective to the study of race and ethnicity.
    7. Define the following concepts: cultural pluralism, cultural relativism, ethnocentrism, assimilation, and multiculturalism.

    Outcome 2:
    Demonstrate an overall knowledge of the social impact of prejudice and discrimination.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the concepts of prejudice, discrimination, stereotypes, racial profiling, racism, sexism and ageism.
    2. Identify the social impact of prejudice and discrimination, including their similarities and differences.
    3. List and define the various theories and explanations of prejudice, including exploitation theory, scapegoat theory, authoritarian personality theory, and normative theory.
    4. Explain how and why prejudice and discrimination perpetuate inequality.

    Outcome 3:
    Demonstrate an overall knowledge of racial and ethnic groups.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the impact of race, ethnicity influence people’s life chances.
    2. Explain how current race and ethnic relations and influenced by the historical treatment of minorities.
    3. List the key components of the historical struggle for equality.
    4. Identify and explain the historical and current effect of immigration on race and ethnic relations.
    5. Explain the role of minority leaders in the struggle for equality and the impact they had on race and ethnic relations.
    6. Describe the role of language in race and ethnic relations.
    7. Identify the function of family in the passing of cultural, religious and historical concepts of racial and ethnic identities.
    8. Provide examples of contemporary issues affecting the minority groups in the U.S.

    Outcome 4:
    Demonstrate an overall knowledge of the role of religion in Race and Ethnic Relations.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the role religion plays in race and ethnic relations.
    2. Identify the stereotypes, prejudices and discrimination religion minorities’ experience.
    3. Define religions role in creating an ethnic identity.
    4. Describe the impact of religion and class influence people’s life chances.
    5. Explain how/why religious diversity can affect social acceptance.
    6. Explain the concept of religion as an ethnic identity.

    Outcome 5:
    Demonstrate a n overall knowledge of the roles of other minority group

    Objectives:

    1. List and explain the reasons that the experience of social disadvantage if not limited to groups defined by race, ethnicity, gender, or religion.
    2. Identify and describe other minority groups (Women, Native Americans, the elderly, the disabled and sexual orientation) that are affected by prejudice and discrimination.
    3. Explain the historical struggles of these minority groups and the social impact it has had on society.
    4. Describe how and why prejudice and discrimination perpetuate inequalities between dominant and subordinate groups.
    5. Identify the different movements that have improved the social and/or economic conditions of these minority groups.

    Outcome 6:
    Demonstrate an overall knowledge of the issue of diversity in the world and the steps being taken to achieve multiculturalism.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast prejudice and discrimination in other countries (world) to the United States.
    2. Explain ethno‐national conflicts and their global impact.
    3. Describe the effect of colonialism on current race and ethnic relations.
    4. Explain the origins and purposes of affirmative action programs.
    5. Depict the global nature of dominant‐subordinate relations along dimensions of race, ethnicity, religion, and gender.
    6. Provide an explanation
    7. Explain why even though there has been progress made for each of these groups, as well as the racial and ethnic minorities discussed earlier, there still remains a full agenda for further progress.
    8. Explain the origins and purposes of affirmative action programs.
    9. List and describe the social impact of the numerous rights movements. Who did the movement help and why.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Understanding Race and Ethnicity Overview
      1. Factors that determines a dominant and a subordinate group.
      2. The role of power and privilege in relations between a minority and a majority.
      3. The four types of subordinate groups.
      4. The complexity and the social importance of race.
      5. How race is socially constructed.
      6. Different sociological perspectives regarding intergroup relations
      7. The importance of the processes that creates dominant/subordinate groups.
    2. Prejudice Overview
      1. Hate crimes and the current trends of hate crimes.
      2. How prejudice plays a role in perceptions of people seen as racially different.
      3. Similarities and differences between prejudice and discrimination.
      4. Theories and explanations of prejudice, including exploitation theory, scapegoat theory, authoritarian personality theory, and normative theory.
      5. Prejudice including stereotypes, racial profiling, and current trends in stereotypes.
      6. The mood of the oppressed and examine intergroup hostility.
      7. Possibilities that lead to a reduction of prejudice between groups.
      8. Potential employers respond to ethnic‐sounding names.
      9. Different ways to fight hate.
    3. Discrimination Overview
      1. Explanations of why discrimination occurs.
      2. Institutional factors that perpetuates inequality.
      3. Consequences of low‐wage labor, including how a large portion of racial and ethnic minorities are among the working poor.
      4. Factors that can exacerbate one’s subordinate status.
      5. Origins and purposes of affirmative action programs.
      6. Ways in which members of subordinate groups respond to situations of institutional discrimination.
    4. Immigration and the United States Overview
      1. How immigration is a global phenomenon.
      2. History and patterns of immigration in the United States.
      3. The evolution of laws concerning immigration to the United States.
      4. Common stereotypes about immigrants.
      5. Characteristics of today’s foreign‐born immigrant population in the United States.
      6. Distinction between legal and illegal immigration, the roles that immigrants play in the United States economy and what our society would be like without illegal immigrants.
      7. Economic impact of immigration in the United States.
      8. Government’s policy toward refugees and asylees
    5. Ethnicity and Religion Overview
      1. How religion and ethnicity contribute to defining identity.
      2. Different sociological perspectives regarding the origins and functions of ethnicity in the United States.
      3. Formation of Whiteness as an identity, and the experiences of White ethnics in the United States.
      4. How race, religion, ethnicity, and class influence people’s life chances.
      5. Religious diversity in the United States.
      6. Price paid by White ethnics in the Unite d States.
    6. The Native Americans Overview
      1. Historical interactions between Europeans and Native Americans.
      2. History of legislation targeting Native Americans.
      3. Federal policies affect life on reservations.
      4. Pan‐Indianism and how Native Americans today address issues of economic development, education, health care, religious and spiritual expression, and the environment.
      5. Role of sovereignty in Native‐American tribal self‐rule.
      6. Treaties and warfare and the consequences of each.
      7. Native American Legal Claims, the Termination Act, and the Employment Assistance Program.
      8. Collective action efforts through pan‐indianism and protest efforts.
      9. The Navajo Way.
    7. The Making of African Americans in a White America Overview
      1. History of African Americans from colonial times through 2007.
      2. Origins of slavery and its continuing impact on Black‐White relations.
      3. Causes and nature of protest movements against racial inequality.
      4. Diversity of Black leaders? approaches to the problem of inequality.
      5. Role of religion in the struggle for racial equality in the United States.
      6. Long history of Sundown Towns where non‐Whites could work and spend their money but not live.
    8. African Americans Today Overview
      1. Impact of segregation on African American education.
      2. Effects of low‐income, prejudice, and discrimination on life for contemporary African Americans.
      3. Current economic situation of African Americans.
      4. Strengths, weaknesses, and unique challenges of African American families.
      5. Causes and effects of residential segregation.
      6. Problems facing the African American community in areas such as criminal justice (including the implementation of the death penalty), health care, and policics.
      7. The assertion that some African American youth do poorly in school because they do not want to “act White.”
    9. Hispanic Americans Overview
      1. Diversity of the Latino America n or Hispanic population in the United States.
      2. Important elements of Hispanic identity.
      3. Significance of language to Latino American identity as well as the key components of the debates surrounding this issue.
      4. An introductory view of the economic picture of Latinos as a group.
      5. Significance of the borderlands to Mexicans and Mexican Americans as well as other Hispanic groups.
      6. Experiences of Cuban immigrants to the United States and the issues they face as they remain in this country.
      7. Diversity of experiences of Central and South American immigrants to the United States and the possibilities f or future generations of these immigrants.
    10. Mexican Americans and Puerto Ricans Overview
      1. Similarities and differences between the experiences of Mexican Americans and Puerto Ricans in the United States.
      2. Factors influencing the immigration of Mexicans to the United States.
      3. Unique relationship between Puerto Rico and the United States and h ow this affects Puerto Ricans.
      4. Situation of Mexican Americans and Puerto Ricans in the United States in regard to education, economic opportunities, family life, access to health care, involvement in politics, and religion.
    11. Muslim and Arab Americans: Diverse Minorities Overview
      1. Diversity of Muslim and Arab people in the United States.
      2. Arab Americans and the characteristics of their communities.
      3. Muslim Americans and the characteristics of their communities.
      4. Experiences of Muslim and Arab immigrants to the United States.
      5. Muslim and Arab family life, gender, education, and politics in the United States.
      6. Experience of anti‐Arab and anti‐Muslim feelings on Muslim and Arab Americans.
      7. Current issues of prejudice and discrimination toward Arab and Muslim Americans.
    12. Asian Americans: Growth and Diversity Overview
      1. Experience of Asian Americans in general and the experiences of Koreans, Filipinos, Asian Indians and refugees from Southeast Asia more specifically.
      2. Image of the ?model minority? and how this stereotype impacts the life chances of Asian Americans.
      3. Political efforts of different Asian American populations, as well as an understanding of some of the reasons for their lack of political participation.
      4. Experiences of Filipino immigrants to the United States and the unique limitations that this group of Asian American’s face.
      5. Issues faced by Asian Indian immigrants to the United States.
      6. Experiences of refugees and other immigrants from Southeast Asia and the current issues they face.
      7. Ways in which Korean Americans have worked to move out of their subordinate status.
      8. Hawaii and its people, understanding the factors that lead to its diversity as well as the issues that such diversity presents.
    13. Chinese Americans and Japanese Americans Overview
      1. Present‐day Chinese Americans are descendants of both pre‐Exclusion Act immigrants and those who immigrated afer World War II.
      2. Occupational profile of Chinese Americans.
      3. What life is like inside Chinatown.
      4. Family and religious life of Chinese Americans.
      5. Migration of Chinese people to the United States.
      6. Historical situation of Japanese Americans in the United States.
      7. Japanese Americans encountered discrimination and ill treatment in the early twentieth century.
      8. Wartime evacuation experience of Japanese Americans during World War II.
      9. Economic picture of Japanese Americans today.
      10. Family and religious life of Japanese Americans.
      11. Remnants of prejudice and discrimination of Chinese and Japanese Americans in the United States.
    14. Jewish Americans: Quest to Maintain Identy Overview
      1. Jewish people are an ethnic group.
      2. Identity rests not on the presence o f physical traits or religious beliefs but on a sense of belonging that is tied to Jewish ancestry.
      3. Distinctive aspects of the Jewish population.
      4. Migration patterns of Jewish people to the U .S. and how this has influenced the formation of a Jewish identity.
      5. Origins and impacts of anti‐Semitism on the lives and culture of Jewish people.
      6. Anti‐Semitism inside and outside of the United States.
      7. Present situation of Jewish people in the United States with regard to their employment, education, organizational activity, and political activity.
      8. Religious life of Jewish Americans focusing on both the Orthodox tradition and Reform tradition.
      9. Importance of the role of the family, the role of religion, and the role of cultural heritage in forming Jewish identity and Jewish culture in the United States.
    15. Women: The Oppressed Majority Overview
      1. Women are an oppressed group even though they form the numerical majority.
      2. Similarities between women and racial and ethnic groups.
      3. Socialization has an impact on the development and perception of gender roles.
      4. Impact of gender roles in perpetuating inequalities between men and women.
      5. Conflict theory, functional theory, and labeling theory explain gender role socialization.
      6. Historical and contemporary concerns of the feminist movement.
      7. Current economic picture of women.
      8. Issues and sources of discrimination and sexual harassment geared toward women.
      9. Concept of the feminization of poverty.
      10. Experience of women in education and how it is similar to their experience in the labor force.
      11. Present situation of family life for women, including the areas of child care and housework and abortion.
      12. Political activity of women.
      13. Matrix of domination applied to minority women.
    16. Beyond the United States: The Comparative Perspective Overview
      1. Subordinating people because of race, nationality, or religion is not a phenomenon unique to the United States; it occurs throughout the world.
      2. World systems theory and ethno national conflicts.
      3. How racial and ethnic differences differ from society to society, focusing on Mexico, Canada, Brazil, Israel, and the Republic of South Africa.
      4. Status of women on a global level and how the global level compares to the status of women in the United States.
      5. Social construction of race through the application of the color gradient.
      6. Issues of identity and culture both unify and divide communities and nations using Mexico, Canada, Brazil, Israel, and the Republic of South Africa.
      7. Foundations of the conflict between Israelis and Palestinians as well as consider the likelihood of resolution to this conflict.
      8. Impact of colonialism and apartheid on current race relations in the Republic of South Africa.
      9. Global nature of dominant‐subordinate relations along dimensions of race, ethnicity, religion, and gender.
    17. Overcoming Exclusion Overview
      1. Experience of social disadvantage if not limited to groups defined by race, ethnicity, gender, or religion.
      2. How the elderly are still a group at a disadvantage, given the ageism in our society.
      3. How and why older people in the United States are subject to a paradox.
      4. Advocacy efforts by the elderly.
      5. Process and consequences of labeling the disabled.
      6. Ways in which people with disabilities have sought t o achieve both respect and opportunities.
      7. How the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) is a significant step forward.
      8. Advocacy efforts by the disabled.
      9. How long‐term homophobia has made it a challenge for gays and lesbians to go about their lives.
      10. Advocacy efforts for gay and lesbian rights.
      11. Even though there has been progress made for each of these groups, as well as the racial and ethnic minorities discussed earlier, there still remains a full agenda for further progress.

    Primary Faculty
    Kingry, Bryan
    Secondary Faculty
    Zaranek, Rochelle
    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Spanish Language

  
  • SPAN 1260 - Elementary Spanish 1


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (5 Contact hrs)
    This course is designed to introduce students to the Spanish speaking world and Spanish vocabulary and grammatical structures necessary to express personal meaning on basic topics. Students will engage in these activities within contextualized cultural settings. The vocabulary and grammatical structures are integrated into interactive and communicative activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading, and writing. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in basic oral language skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in small conversations with a Native Speaker in the present and future tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Getting acquainted.
      2. Give and receive information about time, schedule, work, school, weather.
      3. Make phone calls.
      4. Express ownership and relationships.
      5. Describe people and feelings.
      6. Handle social situations such as sports events.
      7. Plan a vacation.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic Spanish vocabulary.

    Objectives:
    Regarding topics such as school, work, free time, vacation, transportation, city places, family, social interactions, professions, and weather expressions:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic grammar structures in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate regular, irregular, and stem changing present tense verbs.
    2. Use ordinal and cardinal numbers.
    3. Use present progressive verb forms.
    4. Use ser vs. estar, as appropriate.
    5. Use nouns and articles.
    6. Use descriptive and possessive adjectives and article agreements.
    7. Formulate questions and answers.
    8. Use saber vs. conocer, as appropriate.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Spanish culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some basic geographical, economical and cultural aspects of some Spanish speaking countries and/or communities such education, sports, and leisure activities, dances and music, food, and family relationship and professions.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Lesson 1
      Preparation: BASIC greetings and farewells, Introductions, Courtesy expressions
      Video: All aboard!
      Pronunciation: the Spanish alphabet
      Exploration: The greetings
    2. Grammar
      Nouns and articles
      Numbers 0‐30
      Present tense of ser (to be)
    3. Telling time
      Extension
      Reading: Important phone numbers and email addresses
      Exam on Lesson 1
    4. Lesson 2: Classes
      Preparation: Places and courses at the university, Things and people at the university, Days of the week
      Pronunciation: Spanish vowels
      Video: What classes are you taking?
      Exploration: the universities in the Spanish speaking world
    5. Grammar
      Present indicative of -ar verbs
      Forming questions in Spanish
      The present tense of estar (to be)
      Numbers 31‐100
    6. Extension
      Reading: UAM: the best university of Europe
      Hispanic countries: The United States and Canada
      Exam on Lesson 2
    7. Lesson 3: The family
      Preparation: Family relationships, Professions
      Pronunciation: Diphthongs and linking
      Video: Is your family big?
      Exploration: the family in the Hispanic world
    8. Grammar
      Descriptive adjectives
      Possessive adjectives
      Present tense of regular -er and -ir verbs
      Present tense of tener (to have) and venire (to come)
    9. Extension
      Reading: families of all type
      Exam on Lesson 3
      MIDTERM
    10. Lesson 4: The weekend
      Preparation: Pastimes, Sports, Places in the city
      Pronunciation: Words stress
      Video; Let’s go to the park!
      Exploration: Soccer: passion of multitudes
    11. Grammar
      Present tense of ir (to go)
      Stem changing verbs: e to ie, o to ue
      Stem changing verbs: e to i
      Verbs with irregular I forms
    12. Extension
      Reading: Guid e for the weekend
      Hispanic countries: México
      Exam on Lesson 4
    13. Lesson 5: Vacations
      Preparation: Words rela ted to vacation and lodging, Weather expressions, Activities and words related to transportation, Seasons and months,
      Ordinal numbers
      Pronunciation: Spanish b and v
      Video: We have a reservation
      Exploration: The lodging
    14. Grammar
      To be (estar) with conditions and emotions
      The present progressive Comparing Ser and Estar (to be and to be)
      Direct object nouns and pronouns
    15. Extension
      Reading: Disco ver the Old San Juan!
      Exam on Lesson 5
    16. FINAL EXAM Week
      First session of the week: WRITTEN exam
      Second session of the week: ORAL exam

    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPAN 1265 - Elementary Spanish for Health Care 1


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    SPAN-1265 provides basic Spanish grammatical structures, vocabulary, and cultural information to allow healthcare providers to understand Hispanic culture and communicate in Spanish. The course uses reading and writing exercises and interactive communicative activities to integrate structure, Spanish medical vocabulary, and colloquial terms specific to healthcare-related situations. The cultural part of the course helps students understand Spanish speakers’ customs and communication styles.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in basic oral language skills related to the health care field.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in small conversations with a Native Speaker in the present and future tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Getting acquainted/Greeting patients.
      2. Give and receive information about time, schedule, work, school, weather.
      3. Make/answer phone calls.
      4. Express ownership and talk about family relationships.
      5. Describe people and feelings.
      6. Handle medical situations such as asking about how people feel, their symptoms, discuss the patient’s daily routines..
      7. Make appointments.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic Spanish vocabulary related to the health care field.

    Objectives:

    1. Regarding topics such as greetings, introductions and farewells, basic personal information, food and diet, body parts, symptoms and illnesses, the student will use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Regarding topics such as greetings, introductions and farewells, basic personal information, food and diet, body parts, symptoms and illnesses, the student will respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary. c. Regarding topics such as greetings, introductions and farewells, basic personal information, food and diet, body parts, symptoms and illnesses, the student will use vocabulary in writing. d. Regarding topics such as greetings, introductions and farewells, basic personal information, food and diet, body parts, symptoms and illnesses, the student will demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use basic grammar structures in speaking and writing applied to the health care field.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate regular, irregular, and stem changing present tense verbs.
    2. Use ordinal and cardinal numbers.
    3. Use present progressive verb forms.
    4. Use ser vs. estar, as appropriate.
    5. Use nouns and articles.
    6. Use descriptive and possessive adjectives and article agreements.
    7. Formulate questions and answers.
    8. Use direct object pronouns.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Spanish culture related to the health care field.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss the ways in which Hispanics handle medical situations.
    2. Compare cultural differences.
    3. Understand the role of family and friends in medical situations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lesson 1. Greeting the Patient
    Greetings, Introductions and Farewells
    Numbers 1‐100 and Spanish Alphabet
    Subject pronouns and the verb ‘ser’
    Talking about weather

    Lesson 2. Making Appointments
    The Family
    Expressing Possession in Spanish
    Telling Time
    Numbers above 100, Days, Months, Years, and Dates
    Regular Present Tense Verbs
    Questions, negatives and the verb ‘estar’

    Lesson 3. Discussing How Patients Feel
    Irregular verbs
    Stem‐changing verbs
    The verb ‘ir’
    Saber vs. conocer
    Adjectives
    Idioms using ‘tener’
    Talking on the phone in Spanish

    Lesson 4. The Daily Routine
    Reflexive verbs
    Demonstrative adjectives
    Direct object pronouns
    The present progressive
    Food and diet
    Time construction using ‘Hace”

    Lesson 5. Where Does it Hurt?
    Body parts
    Indirect object pronouns
    Double object pronouns
    Formal commands
    Adverbs
    Comparisons


    Primary Faculty
    Ramos, Maria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPAN 1270 - Elementary Spanish 2


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    This course continues students’ development of Spanish language and culture by building and expanding on the culture, vocabulary and language structures learned in SPAN-1260 or SPAN-1265. New language functions will be presented in meaningful activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading, and writing and allow for further cultural exposure. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPAN-1260, or SPAN-1265, or two or more years of high school Spanish

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Elementary Spanish 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, and past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Going shopping.
      2. Past actions and events.
      3. Daily routine.
      4. Preparing meals and comparing Hispanic world cuisine.
      5. Ordering meals at a restaurant.
      6. Talking about celebrations.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Spanish vocabulary beyond Elementary Spanish 1.

    Objectives:
    Regarding topics such as clothing and grocery shopping, restaurants, food, weather, daily routine, celebrations:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond Elementary Spanish 1 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate regular and irregular preterit.
    2. Use preterit verb tenses.
    3. Use direct, indirect, reflexive, and possessive pronouns.
    4. Use Gustar and similar.
    5. Use affirmative and negative words.
    6. Use pronouns after prepositions.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Spanish culture beyond Elementary Spanish 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some geographical, economical and cultural aspects of some Spanish speaking countries and/or communities such as celebrations and festivities, shopping habits, food and eating habits.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review of SPAN‐1260
      Lesson 6
      Going shopping
      Preparation and video
      Grammar: Numbers 101 and higher
    2. Grammar: The preterit of regular verbs
      Indirect object pronouns
      Demonstrative adjectives and pronouns
      Reading
    3. Spanish speaking countries: the Caribbean
      Exam 6 in class
      Lesson 7
      The daily routine
      Preparation and video
    4. Grammar: Reflexive verbs
      Indefinite and negative words
      Preterit of to be and to go
    5. Grammar: to like and similar verbs
      Reading
      Exam 7 in class
    6. Lesson 8
      To eat
      Preparation and video
      Grammar: The preterit of stem‐changing verbs
      Double object pronouns
    7. Grammar: To know
      Comparisons and superlatives
      Reading
      Spanish speaking countries: South America (part 1)
    8. Exam 8 in class
      Review for the Midterm
    9. MIDTERM in class
      Lesson 9
      The celebrations
      Preparation and video
      Grammar: Irregular preterits
      Verbs that change meaning in the preterit
    10. Grammar: Irregular preterits
      Verbs that change meaning in the preterit
      Relative pronouns
    11. Grammar: What and Which?
      Reading
      Exam 9 i n class
    12. Lesson 10
      In the doctor office
      Preparation and video
      Grammar: The imperfect tense
    13. Grammar: Impersonal constructions
      Adverbs
    14. Reading
      Spanish speaking countries: South America (part 2)
    15. Exam 10 in class
      Review for the final exams
    16. FINAL EXAMS in class
      Oral exam
      Written exam

    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPAN 2360 - Intermediate Spanish 1


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    Third-semester Spanish picks up where SPAN-1270 has ended. The central goal is to advance the student’s communicative ability and cultural competency with an emphasis on assimilating the language for complex communicative purposes. New language functions will be presented in meaningful activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading and writing, and empower further cultural exploration. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPAN-1270

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Elementary Spanish 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, or past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker)
      1. Talking about health.
      2. Talking about cars and technology.
      3. Discussing dwellings and house appliances.
      4. Talking about nature and environment.
      5. Giving directions in a city.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Spanish vocabulary beyond Elementary Spanish 2.

    Objectives: Regarding topics such as health, cars, technology, housing, nature, environment, and directions:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond Elementary Spanish 2 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate and use imperfect tense and contrast it with preterit.
    2. Use “se” and of adverbs.
    3. Conjugate and use formal and informal commands.
    4. Conjugate and use present subjunctive.
    5. Past participles used as adjectives.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Spanish culture beyond Elementary Spanish 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some geographical, economical and cultural aspects of some Spanish speaking countries and/or communities such as technology, health, city life, and environmental issues.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Subject
    1 Repaso de SPAN 1270 (Review Span1270)
    2

    Lección 10:

    Preparación y Vocabulario: En el consultorio

    1. Estructura: El imperfecto
    2. Estructura: The preterite and the imperfect
    3
    1. Estructura: El uso de se
    2. Estructura: Los adverbios

    A Repasar, Tarea Escrita

    Examen 10 Test 10 Written & Oral

    4

    Yo Puedo (reflexión)

    Lección 11

    Preparación y Vocabulario: El carro y la tecnología

    1. Estructura: Familiar (tú) Commands
    2. Estructura: Por and  para
    5
    1. Estructura: Reciprocal reflexives
    2. Estructura: Stressed possessive adjectives and pronouns

    A Repasar, Tarea Escrita

    6

    Examen 11 Test 11 Written & Oral

    Yo Puedo (reflexión)

    Lección 12

    Preparación y Vocabulario: la vivienda

    Estructura: Relative Pronouns

    7
    1. Estructura: Formal (Ud. and Uds.) commands
    2. Estructura: The present subjunctive
    8
    1. Estructura: Subjunctive with verbs of will and influence

    A Repasar, Tarea Escrita

    9

    Examen 12 Test 12 Written & Oral

    Yo Puedo (reflexión)

    Repaso para Examen Oral Parcial (Midterm)

    10

    Examen Oral Parcial (midterm in class)

    Lección 13

    Preparación y Vocabulario: la naturaleza

    1. Estructura: The subjunctive with verbs of emotion
    11
    1. Estructura: The subjunctive with doubts, disbelief, and denial
    2. Estructura: The subjunctive with  conjunctions
    12

    A Repasar, Tarea Escrita

    Examen 13 Test 13 Written & Oral

    13

    Yo Puedo (reflexión)

    Lección 14

    Preparación y Vocabulario: en la ciudad

    1. Estructura: The subjunctive in adjective clauses
    14
    1. Estructura: Nosotros/as commands
    2. Estructura: Past Participles used as adjectives

    A Repasar, Tarea Escrita

    15

    Examen 14 Test 14 Written & Oral

    Yo Puedo (reflexión)

    Repaso para el examen final

    16 EXAMEN FINAL en clase (Oral Final Exam)

     


    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPAN 2370 - Intermediate Spanish 2


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    This course will stress the expansion of the student’s vocabulary, language skills and cultural competency. Classroom activities will center on a thorough review of the most important aspects of Spanish grammar, as well as active oral and written use of the language. The oral exercises will expose students to extended discourse and will develop content and context as appropriate for students moving from the intermediate to the more advanced proficiency levels. Authentic material will provide the student with opportunities to critically engage with elaborate cultural situations. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Prerequisites:
     

    Prerequisite: SPAN-2360


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Intermediate Spanish 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, and past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker):
      1. Talking about health and well-being 
      2. Discussing professions and occupations and reading classifieds and looking for jobs
      3. Discussing Art and Media
      4. Debating curent events and politics

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Spanish vocabulary beyond Intermediate Spanish 1.

    Objectives:
    Regarding topics such as careers, health, arts and media and politics:  

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammatical structures beyond Intermediate Spanish 1 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:
    Students will review grammatical structures, including:

    1. The present and the past perfect
    2. The present perfect subjunctive
    3. The future
    4. The future perfect
    5. The past subjunctive
    6. The conditional
    7. The conditional perfect
    8. The past perfect subjunctive
    9. Si clauses
    10. Summary of the uses of subjunctive

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Spanish culture beyond Intermediate Spanish 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some geographical, economical, social and cultural aspects of some Spanish speaking countries and/or communities such as health systems, hospitals, arts and media, and politics.
    2. Examine media of Spanish‐speaking countries (literature, visual art, music and songs, and/or cinema).
    3. Compare cultural differences.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to critically discuss, in Spanish, literary and/or journalistic works read in Spanish.

    Objectives:

    1. Convey desired message.
    2. Analyze the meaning of the work.
    3. Support ideas conveyed using examples from the work.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week(s)  Topic(s)
    1 Course Introduction and review of previous course
    2, 3

    Preliminary Chapter Lesson 1: Sentir y
    Para Empezar: Blog: Una cita (in)olvidable. Las relaciones personales
    Cortometraje: España 2014
    Imagina: Estados Unidos
    Estructuras: gustar and similar verbs; reflexive verbs; the preterite;
    Gramática: nouns and articles, the present tense
    Cultura: Corriente Latina
    Literatura: Poema 20
    Exam on Lección 1

    4, 5

    Lesson 2: Vivir en la ciudad

    subjunctive
    Para Empezar: Blog: Un viaje insperado - En la ciudad
    Cortometraje: Adiós Mamá
    Imagina: México
    Estructuras: the preterite vs. the imperfect; object pronouns; commands
    Gramática: possessive adjectives and pronouns
    Cultura: Fin de semana en Buenos Aires
    Literatura: Aqueronte
    Exam on Lección 2
    6, 7

    Lesson 3: Generaciones en movimiento
    Para Empezar: Blog: Volver a las raíces - En familia
    Cortometraje: El Rincón de Venezuela
    Imagina: Cuba; Puerto Rico y la República Dominicana
    Estructuras: the subjunctive in noun clauses; the subjunctive in adjective clauses; the subjunctive in adverbial clauses
    Gramática: adverbs
    Cultura: Sonia Sotomayor: la niña que soñaba
    Literatura: El eclipse
    Exam on Lección 3

    8

    Review for midterm
    MIDTERM

    9, 10

    Lesson 4: Perspectivas laborales
    Para Empezar: Blog: Mis primeros pasos en la industria cafetera - El trabajo y las finanzas
    Cortometraje: Recursos humanos
    Imagina: Colombia; Ecuador y Venezuela
    Estructuras: the future and the conditional; comparatives and superlatives; the present and past perfects
    Gramática: prepositions
    Cultura: Recursos naturales: una salida al mundo
    Literatura: La intrusa
    Exam on Lección 4

    11, 12

    Lesson 5: El valor de las ideas
    Para Empezar: Blog: ¿Nace un activista?- Creencias e ideologías
    Cortometraje: Hiyab
    Imagina: Costa Rica; El Salvador; Guatemala; Honduras; Nicaragua y Panamá
    Estructuras: the past subjunctive; the future perfect and the conditional perfect; negative, affirmative, and indefinite expressions
    Gramática: relative pronouns
    Cultura: Chile: dictadura y democracia
    Literatura: La mirada
    Exam on Lección 5

    13, 14

    Lesson 6: Herencia y destino
    Lección 6 - Herencia y destino
    Para Empezar: Blog: ¿Un eterno emigrante?- Nuestro futuro
    Cortometraje: Un pedazo de tierra
    Imagina: España
    Estructuras: the passive voice and constructions with se; the present and past perfect subjunctive; Si clauses
    Gramática: the infinitive and the present participle
    Cultura: La ciudad redescubierta
    Literatura: Algo muy graveva a suceder en este pueblo
    Exam on Lección 6

    15, 16

    Review for Final Exams
    FINAL EXAMS
    Written Exam
    Oral Exam


    Primary Faculty
    Williams, Susanna
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Speech Communication Arts

  
  • SPCH 1010 - Introduction to Communication


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    An introduction to the discipline of communication. Emphasis is on basic theories of communication and the contexts in which communication occurs. The course surveys multiple areas of communication: general principles, interpersonal, small groups, intercultural, organizational, conflict, presentation speaking, and mass media.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will explain the significance of communication to the human experience.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will explain intrapersonal communication.
    2. The student will practice communication ethics.
    3. The student will solve communication problems using critical thinking.
    4. The student will explain using a communication model how communication and miscommunication can occur.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will employ basic interpersonal communication theory.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate verbal communication (language and meaning).
    2. The student will classify nonverbal communication.
    3. The student will listen and paraphrase messages.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply a skill base teaching them to be a competent member of a problem solving group.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate knowledge and usage of tools and skill resources for group production.
    2. The student will apply leadership theory.
    3. The student will use interaction skills in a group setting.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare an analysis of communication and culture.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will discuss language diversity.
    2. The student will explain diverse cultural patterns.
    3. The student will discuss language and intercultural communication.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will analyze professional communication theory.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will name and explain the theoretical concepts central to organizational communication.
    2. The student will recognize the professional communication behaviors that reflect these concepts.
    3. The student will be able to identify and distinguish how conflict occurs and the role communication plays in its development, management, and resolution.
    4. The student will be able to prepare a topic with a central idea for an analyzed audience.
    5. The student will discuss the importance of public relations.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of mass media in society.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be able to use theory to explain the evolution of mass media.
    2. The student will relate the use of radio, television, internet, including the use of social media in society.
    3. The student will explain the place of journalism, ethics, and content in mass media.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Unit One - Understanding Communication

    a. Problem(s): What is the significance of communication to the human experience?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Intrapersonal

    ii. Communication Ethics

    iii. Critical Thinking

    iv. Communication Models

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    2. Unit Two - Understanding Inter-personal Relationships

    a. Problem(s): What is the importance of interpersonal communication?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Demonstrating Verbal Communication

    ii. Language and Meaning

    iii. Classifying Non-verbal Communication

    iv. Listening

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    3. Unit Three - Understanding Small Groups

    a. Problem(s): What is the skill base to be a competent member of a problem solving group?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Knowledge, Usage of Tools, Skill Resources

    ii. Leadership

    iii. Interaction Skills

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    4. Unit Four - Understanding Intercultural Communication

    a. Problem(s): How does one participate in intercultural communication?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Language Diversity

    ii. Diverse Cultural Patterns

    iii. Language and Intercultural Communication

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    5. Unit Five - Understanding Professional Communication Theory

    a. Problem(s): What are the areas of professional communication theory?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Concepts of Organizational Communication

    ii. Conflict and the Role Communication Plays

    iii. Presenting a Topic with a Central Idea for an Analyzed Audience

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    6. Unit Six - Understanding Mass Media

    a. Problem(s): What role does mass media play in society?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Evolution of Mass Media

    ii. The Roles of Radio, Television, Internet (Social Media) in Society

    iii. Journalism, Ethics and Content in Mass Media

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

     


    Primary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Secondary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1060 - Speech Communication


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Basic skills of effective oral communication through varied speech experiences. Emphasis is on gathering and organizing materials; language, style, delivery, and voice improvement; gaining confidence in working with audiences.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a topic with a specific goal for analyzed audience.

    Objectives:

    1. Choose a topic appropriate for the audience and occasion.
    2. Narrow a topic appropriate for the audience and occasion.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document an arranged, full‐sentenced outline in a plain style, in an ethical manner.

    Objectives:

    1. Use appropriate resources to find information, including Internet, library, expert interviews, and personal experience.
    2. Demonstrate critical thinking by developing, listening to, analyzing, and synthesizing issues, contentions, arguments, and forms of support on a selected topic.
    3. Select an organizational pattern, thesis, specific purpose, and full sentence outline pattern which follow the conventions of standard written language in punctuation, grammar, and spelling appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce revisions of a rehearsed presentation.

    Objectives:

    1. Provide appropriate ethical and cited supporting material for the message based on the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    2. Use language and grammar that is appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to deliver an extempore presentation to a specific audience using media aids.

    Objectives:

    1. Use pronunciation, articulation, and vocal variety in rate, pitch, volume, and intensity to heighten and maintain interest.
    2. Use physical behaviors that support the verbal message.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes appply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. UNIT ONE - PHILOSOPHICAL UNDERPINNINGS
      1. Problem: What basic principles must public speakers understand about the speaking/listening process?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Historical Roots of Public Speaking, Logos, Pathos, Ethos as the roots of the Ethical Communication Process
        2. Speaking with Confidence
        3. Critical Listening
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance: Historical Declamation or similar assignment
    2. UNIT TWO - SPEAKER’S TOOL BOX
      1. Problem: What tools and skills must public speakers use?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Audience Analysis
          1. Topic Selection
      3. General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Central Idea
      4. Preparation Outline, Speaking Outline
        1. Forms of Support: Rational and Dramatic
          1. Delivery: Use of voice‐breathing, phonation, articulation, pronunciation
          2. Use of Verbal: language, specificity, accuracy, vividness, appropriateness
          3. Use of Nonverbal: gestures, movement, facial expressions
          4. Media Aids: auditory and visual
      5. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      6. Performance: Delivery Skills, Oral Skills, Narration Speech Emphasized
    3. UNIT THREE - INFORMATIVE SPEAKING
      1. Problem(s): How does a public speaker prepare a speech to instruct using Monroe’s Motivated Sequence (Based on John Dewey’s Principles of thinking)?
        How does a public speaker prepare a speech to explain to an audience about a policy problem that needs changing using Monroe’s Motivated Sequence?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Audience Analysis
        2. General Principles of Learning
        3. Topic Selection
        4. General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Central Idea
        5. Research Skills
          1. Computer
          2. Books
          3. Journals
        6. Documentation (Modern Language Association - MLA)
        7. Preparation Outline, Speaking Outline
        8. Forms of Support both logical and dramatic
          1. Definitions
          2. Illustrations
          3. Jokes
          4. Stories
          5. Facts
          6. Figures and statistics
        9. Connectives ‐ Transitions and Signposts
        10. Language and Grammar appropriate for the audience, occasion, and context
        11. Delivery Review
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance: One‐Point Speech - Information Speech - Issue Speech - Instructional Information Speech
    4. UNIT FOUR - PERSUASIVE SPEAKING
      1. Problem: How does a public speaker prepare a speech to persuade an audience to accept a new policy solution for a problem that needs changing using Monroe’s Motivated Sequence?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Audience Analysis
        2. General Principles of Persuasion
        3. Logical Reasoning and Argument
        4. General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Central Idea
        5. Research Skills Review
        6. Documentation Review
        7. Preparation Outline, Speaking Outline
        8. Significance, Inherency, Criteria Checklist, Plan and Planks
        9. Advantage, Solvency
        10. Forms of Support
        11. Connectives ‐ Transitions and Signposts
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos, Impromptu Speeches and Exercises
      4. Performance: Persuasion Speech or Campaign Speech

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1200 - Group Discussion & Leadership


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Discussion and leadership in business and industry. Conference and meeting formats: panel, forum, symposium, group dynamics, role playing, brainstorming, and problem solving exercises.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a skill base that teaches them to be a competent member of a problem‐solving group.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate mature interpersonal communication attitudes, balance and work habits while planning and self‐assessing communication performance.
    2. Demonstrate knowledge of the basic principles of small group communication including: definitions, types of groups, systems and synergy, formation and development of groups and team building.
    3. Demonstrate knowledge of leadership theory.
    4. Demonstrate knowledge and professional behavior interaction skills including: member needs and groups goals; participation and leadership; task function and maintenance functions; verbal communication and nonverbal communication; cohesiveness and conflict; seeking consensus and offering arguments; structured procedures and creative/critical thinking; negotiation and mediation; shared perceptions and respect for differences; as well as speaking and listening skills by participating in informal and formal group problem solving exercises in business, education, health, or industrial contexts.
    5. Demonstrate knowledge and usage of tools and skill resources for group production including: research; agenda setting; minuting; parliamentary procedure, formats of meetings and conference; and conducting meetings and planning conferences by planning and participating in classroom meetings and conferences simulating business, education, health or industrial context.
    6. Demonstrate leadership skills by leading meetings configured under various management styles in business, education, health, or industrial context.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce demonstrations of agenda‐driven, problem solving meetings, using a variety of discussion formats in an ethical manner.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate mature interpersonal communication attitudes, balance and work habits while planning and self‐assessing communication performance.
    2. Demonstrate knowledge of the basic principles of small group communication including: definitions, types of groups, systems and synergy, formation and development of groups and team building.
    3. Demonstrate knowledge and usage of tools and skill resources for group production including: research; agenda setting; minuting; parliamentary procedure, formats of meetings and conference; and conducting meetings and planning conferences by planning and participating in classroom meetings and conferences simulating business, education, health or industrial context.
    4. Analyze group exercises in business, education, health, or industrial context and self assess personal behavior including evaluation, personal reactions and application of small group theory.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present extempore discussion/problem‐solving symposia to specific audiences using media aids.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate knowledge of leadership theory.
    2. Demonstrate knowledge and professional behavior interaction skills including: member needs and groups goals; participation and leadership; task function and maintenance functions; verbal communication and nonverbal communication; cohesiveness and conflict; seeking consensus and offering arguments; structured procedures and creative/critical thinking; negotiation and mediation; shared perceptions and respect for differences; as well as speaking and listening skills by participating in informal and formal group problem solving exercises in business, education, health, or industrial contexts.
    3. Demonstrate knowledge and usage of tools and skill resources for group production including: research; agenda setting; minuting; parliamentary procedure, formats of meetings and conference; and conducting meetings and planning conferences by planning and participating in classroom meetings and conferences simulating business, education, health or industrial context.
    4. Analyze group exercises in business, education, health, or industrial context and self assess personal behavior including evaluation, personal reactions and application of small group theory.
    5. Demonstrate leadership skills by leading meetings configured under various management styles in business, education, health, or industrial context.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
      2. Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups

    Outline based on Multiple Sources

    1. Unit One - Philosophical Underpinnings Theories
      1. Problem: What are the basic group concepts?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Introduction to Small Group Communication
          1. Defining Small Group Communication
          2. Process of Group Communication
          3. Synergistic System
          4. Types of Groups
          5. Advantages and Disadvantages of Groups
        2. Group Formation and Development
          1. Why People Need Groups
          2. Task and Social Dimensions
          3. How Groups Develop
          4. Group Norms
          5. Dealing with Change
          6. Balancing Needs and Norms
        3. Participation in Groups
          1. Who wants to be a follower?
          2. Theories of Participation
          3. Guidelines for Participation
          4. Dealing with Difficulties
          5. Balanced Participation
        4. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
        5. Performance: Discussion Groups
    2. Unit Two - Speaker’s Tool Box Interaction Skills
      1. Problem: What are the skills necessary for interacting in groups?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Confidence in Groups
          1. Member Confidence
          2. Communication Apprehension
          3. Social Tensions
          4. Assertiveness
          5. Balancing Confidence and Tension
        2. Verbal and Nonverbal Communication in Groups
          1. Two Essential Tools
          2. Language and Meaning
          3. Team Talk
          4. Language Difficulties
          5. Adapting to Language Differences
          6. Importance of Nonverbal Communication
          7. Nonverbal Behavior
          8. The Nonverbal Environment
          9. Creating a Communication Climate
          10. Balancing Language and Nonverbal Behavior
        3. Listening in Groups
          1. Hearing and Listening
          2. The Need for Effective Listening
          3. Types of Listening
          4. Group Roles and Listening
          5. Group Listening Skills
          6. Taking Notes in Groups
          7. Self‐Listening in Groups
          8. Adapting to Different Listeners
          9. Balanced Listening
        4. Conflict and Cohesion in Groups
          1. Conflict in Groups
          2. Constructive and Destructive Conflict
          3. Conflict Styles
          4. Approaches to Conflict Management
          5. Group Cohesion
          6. Adapting to Differences
          7. Balancing Conflict and Cohesion
        5. Skill Practice Assessment: Beebe ‘s Small Group Instrument The Competent Group Communicator
        6. Performance: Discussion Groups
    3. Unit Three - Participation Tools
      1. Problem(s): What is leadership? What are the processes necessary to achieve group’s goals? Why Argue?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Leadership in Groups
          1. Leadership and Power
          2. Becoming a Leader
          3. Leadership Theories
          4. The 4‐M Model of Leadership Effectiveness
          5. Diversity and Leadership
          6. Balanced Leadership
        2. Decision Making and Problem Solving in Groups
          1. Group Decision Making
          2. Decision Making Methods
          3. Understanding the Discussion Question
          4. The Need for Procedures
          5. Problem‐Solving Models
          6. Decision‐Making Methods and Tools
          7. Creative Problem Solving
          8. Decision‐Making Realities
          9. Balanced Decision Making
        3. Argumentation in Groups
          1. Argumentativeness
          2. The Structure of an Argument
          3. Presenting Your Arguments(s)
          4. Refuting Arguments
          5. Ethical Arguments
          6. Adapting to Argumentative Styles
          7. Balanced Argumentation
        4. Motivation in Groups
          1. The Language of Motivation
          2. Group Motivation
          3. Motivation and Assessment
          4. Motivation and Rewards
          5. Balancing Motivation, Assessment and Rewards
        5. Skill Practice Assessment: Speech Instruments
        6. Performance: Group Discussions
    4. Unit Four - Achieving Group Goals ‐ Processes
      1. Problem: What are the resources and goals small group communicators need?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Informed Groups
          1. Becoming a well‐informed group
          2. Note your sources
          3. Sources of Information
          4. Types of Information
          5. Evaluating Information
          6. Using Information Effectively
          7. Balancing Information Quality and Quantity
        2. Technology and Virtual Groups
          1. Technology and Group Communication
          2. Group Communication Media
          3. Groupware
          4. Collaborative Presentation Technology
          5. Balancing Technology in Groups
          6. Research Skills - Technology
        3. Planning and Conducting Meetings
          1. Planning the Meeting
          2. Preparing the Agenda
          3. The Chairperson’s Responsibilities
          4. Dealing with Difficulties
          5. Adapting to Difficulties
          6. Preparing the Minutes
          7. Evaluating the Meeting
          8. Balanced Meetings
        4. Making Presentation in Groups
          1. Presentations in Groups
          2. Oral Presentation Guidelines
          3. Technology and Presentation Aids
          4. Group Presentations
          5. Questions and Answers
          6. Balanced Oral Presentations
        5. Parliamentary Procedure
          1. The Rules of the Game
          2. Parliamentary Procedure’s Principles and Players
          3. Basic Rules of Order
          4. Informal Rules
          5. Balanced Procedures
        6. Skill Practice Assessment: Observations
        7. Performance
          1. Agenda
          2. Minuting
        8. Parliamentary Procedure

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1400 - Mass Media Communication in a Global Culture


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Theories and practices of media content and form focusing on news, radio, television, film, and the Internet. Students will learn the whole process of creating the diversified forms of programming for the media. Audience analysis research will be conducted followed by critical review of programming and media production. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare various critiques about the content of media in today’s culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the role media plays in a global society.
    2. Explain media content.
    3. Explain how society views the media.
    4. Explain the differences between old media and the new media such as the Internet.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document knowledge of media as it relates to the functions of society.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the role of the writer of media.
    2. Discuss writing techniques within media.
    3. Discuss the creation of media messages in society.
    4. Discuss how media affects various cultures.
    5. Discuss how cultures affect the media.
    6. Discuss the differences between writing styles of the various forms of media content.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce and perform a variety of media content and analysis.

    Objectives:

    1. Systematize a schema for a performance/presentation.
    2. Systematize a schema for a criticism.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present evidence of analyzing and critiquing media.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to analyze the messages the media portrays.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to properly present a complete critique of media content.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
      2. Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups
    2. Unit One - Philosophical Underpinnings
      1. Problem: What is the importance of understanding mass media in the world today?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Culture and diverse audiences: information, dissemination, entertainment, creative expression and the country’s governance
        2. Culture and the evolution of mass media
        3. Audience: Time people spend using mass media each year
        4. Business: U.S. Business Industries Annual Income
        5. Elements of mass media
        6. Understanding the mass medias
        7. Who owns the media
        8. Who controls the messages
        9. Digital delivery
        10. Mass media and the process of communication
        11. How the new communications network functions: two‐way system
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Search engine review
      4. Performance: Synopsis of sites visited based on critical template; critique a selected television program based on format provided; fill out questionnaires.
    3. Unit Two - Internet Mass Media
      1. Problem(s): What is the relevance of the internet? What boundaries exist for free expression? Who controls the internet: range and quality of postings?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Origins of the internet
        2. Evolution of the internet
        3. Birth and Growth of the internet
        4. Access on the internet
        5. Mapping the internet
        6. Service Providers
        7. Browsers
        8. E‐mail and instant messaging services
        9. Ownership issues of the internet
        10. Free expression, security and access
        11. Privacy issues
        12. Spyware and phishing
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Think‐Pair‐Share Exercises from text
      4. Performance: Students will write papers using the critical process presented to class.
    4. Unit Three - Audio/Video Mass Media
      1. Problem(s): What are the origins, strengths and weaknesses, advantages and disadvantages of the various industries?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Preservation of the original performance
        2. Sound recording and popular music
        3. Popular radio and origins of broadcasting
        4. Television and the power of visual culture
        5. Cable and the specialization of television
        6. Movies and the impact of images: genres
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: In‐depth exposure to the various media by observing selected segments, bites, and scenes. Selecting, gathering personal preference genre for presentation
      4. Performance: Review of Detroit terrestrial and non‐terrestrial markets for radio, television, and cable in the Detroit market; Students will prepare assignments designed for their media specialty: sound tracks, commercials, movie trailers, field trip to the Fox Theater, etc.
    5. Unit Four - Words and Pictures
      1. Problem: What are the origins, strengths and weaknesses, advantages and disadvantages of the various word and picture industries?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Journalism and newspapers
        2. Models of modern print journalism
        3. Categorizing news and U.S. newspapers
        4. Specialty, trade, business, etc.
        5. Magazines
        6. Domination of specialization of magazines
        7. Books and the power of print
        8. Modern publishing and the book industry
        9. The organization and ownership of the book industry
        10. Trends in book publishing
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: In‐depth overview of newsstands and Super Borders
      4. Performance: Comparison/Contrast assignments pertaining to students’ preferred interest area
    6. Unit Five - International Mass Media
      1. Problem: How does International media compare with American media: availability, variety, accessibility, cost, etc.?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Political theories and the media
        2. Differing standards of practices
        3. World media systems
        4. Culture
        5. Business
        6. West Europe and Canada
        7. Eastern Europe
        8. Middle East and North Africa
        9. Africa
        10. Asia and the Pacific
        11. Latin America and the Caribbean
        12. News and information flow
        13. Global media Markets
        14. Global access to the internet
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: View videos and mass media from China and other cultural specific areas
      4. Performance: Compare and contrast foreign newspapers, magazines, movies and television programs, i.e. satellite, in paper or presentations
    7. Unit Six - Mass Media Business
      1. Problem: What are the components and issues in mass media business?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Advertising and commercial culture
        2. Advertising campaigns
        3. Public relations and framing the message
        4. Tensions between public relations and the press
        5. Public relations: social responsibility and the democracy
        6. Media economics and the global marketplace
        7. The culture of journalism: values, ethics, and democracy
        8. Media effects and cultural approaches to research
        9. Legal controls and the freedom to expression
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Search out examples of the above
      4. Performance: Write various forms of media. Critique selected media clips, bytes, selections, etc. by the instructor

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1460 - Introduction to Broadcasting


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Explores the development of broadcasting. Familiarizes and gives practical experience in the use of broadcasting and recording equipment through the production process. Portfolio development projects included. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform various broadcasting techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform fundamental lessons in broadcasting in front of a television camera.
    2. Perform fundamental lessons in broadcasting using audio equipment designed for radio.
    3. Perform fundamental lessons in acting and scene production.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create broadcasts.

    Objectives:

    1. Function with the broadcast media that will be used in the area of telecommunication arts (radio‐TV‐film).
    2. Write media.
    3. Work with audio tape equipment.
    4. Editing with video equipment.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analytically examine important historical broadcast events and various media programming.

    Objectives:

    1. Critically discuss programming on radio and television.
    2. List the important historical social implications of radio and television, and propose reasons and defend them concerning the growth of the telecommunication art industry.
    3. List the major government regulations that control the broadcasters.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present and produce an entire program.

    Objectives:

    1. Produce an entire radio or television program from beginning to end using the methods of Pre‐Production, Production, and Post‐Production.
    2. Present a complete radio or television presentation and production.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
      2. Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups
    2. Unit One - Critically Analyzing Broadcasting and Principles
      1. Problem(s): What is Broadcasting? What are the Rules?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Key Terms and Principles
        2. Communication
        3. History of Radio and Television
        4. Regulations
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Two - Learning Broadcasting Skills
      1. Problem: What are the most important skills?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Communicating Verbally
        2. Communicating Nonverbally
        3. Eye Contact
        4. Script Reading
        5. Presentation in Front of the Camera
        6. Presentation in an Audio Studio Setting
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Three - Applying Broadcasting Skills to Mass Communication Settings
      1. Problem(s): What are the means of communicating?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Understanding Television Production equipment
        2. Understanding Radio equipment
        3. Developing Editing Skills
        4. Developing Writing Skills
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. ASSESSMENTS

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1500 - Voice for Media


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (replaces SPCH-1300 and SPCH-1480) Instruction in drill, voice dynamics and articulation. The student will learn voice care, style and technique. Voice character development and an application to a variety of copy to be used for: announcing, voice overs, and voice acting. Diction, language dialects, and accents will be emphasized.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1460

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcomes 1: Upon completion of the course the student will correctly use their voice instrument.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Use the correct breathing patterns.
    2. Exercise the voice and the body.
    3. Use “correct” pronunciation, articulation and voice inflection for each assignment developed.
    4. Correct any speech problems and habits.
    5. Demonstrate the differences between various dialects.

    Outcomes 2: Upon completion of the course students will be able to prepare definitions of the most frequently used terminology in voice and speech training.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Define the terms used to describe the effective voice: volume, rate, pitch, quality, force, tempo, tone, favorable and unique qualities: friendly, warmth.
    2. Define and explain proper breathing for speech.
    3. Define voice production
    4. Explain physics of voice and speech.
    5. Define and explain phonation.
    6. Define and explain articulation.
    7. Define and explain resonance.
    8. Define and explain enunciation.
    9. Define and explain variety and expressiveness.
    10. Explain the relationship of and connection (melodic voicing) between the voice and personality.
    11. Exercise the voice and the body.
    12. Use “correct” pronunciation, articulation and voice inflection for each assignment developed.
    13. Correct any speech problems and habits.
    14. Demonstrate the differences between various dialects.

    Outcomes 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document criteria for determining adequate oral performance.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Using International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), transcribe vowels.
    2. Using International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), transcribe consonants.

    Outcomes 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop their own style and technique, “air personality” for use in single voice scripts and daily life.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Recognize their own voice limitations.
    2. Learn the skills and techniques of style.
    3. Use their voice limitations to form their own style and technique.
    4. Perfect and improve technique and skills.

    Outcomes 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare materials for announcing.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Write, edit and create his/her own materials.
    2. Use emphasis to point out important and unimportant ideas in the spoken materials using word color.
    3. Prepare and deliver an audition with varied copy of music continuity, commercial announcements, news descriptive material, and extemporaneous ro ad‐lib assignments with versatility and salesmanship.

    Outcomes 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform various announcing techniques.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Demonstrate straight announcing, commercials, products, news casting as MC, sports, interviews, discussion, and narrations.
    2. Demonstrate correct pronunciation, articulation, and voice inflection.

    Outcomes 7: Upon completion of this course, students will develop their own repertoire of characters, based on their voice type, age, and skill as demonstrated in their interpretation of character copy.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Demonstrate long form and industrial narrative copy.
    2. Demonstrate character copy.
    3. Demonstrate imaging, promo and trailers.
    4. Demonstrate roles in animation and anime.
    5. Demonstrate one of the following: audio books; video games; telephone; and automatic dialogue replacement/looping.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Unit One ‐ Philosophical Underpinnings

    a. Problem(s): Why study voice and speech improvement patterns?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Clear Patterns of Pronunciation for Career Communicators

    ii. Clear Patterns of Pronunciation for Effective Conversations

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    2. Unit Two ‐ Definitions of Most Frequently Used Terminology

    a. Problem(s): How is terminology for voice defined?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Volume, Rate, Pitch, Quality, Force, Tempo, Tone, Favorable and Unique Qualities: Friendly, Warmth.

    ii. Proper Breathing for Speech.

    iii. Voice Production

    iv. Physics of Voice and Speech.

    v. Phonation

    vi. Articulation

    vii. Resonance

    vii. Enunciation

    ix. Variety and Expressiveness

    x. Relationship of and Connection (Melodic Voicing) Between the Voice and Personality.

    x. Voice and the Body

    xii. “Correct” Pronunciation, Articulation and Voice Inflection for each Assignment Developed

    xiii. Correcting Speech Problems and Habits.

    xiv. Differences Between Various Dialects and Accents

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    3. Unit Three ‐ Adequate Oral Performance

    a. Problem(s): How does one document oral performance?

    b. Theory Base

    i. International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) Transcribing Vowels

    ii. International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) Transcribing Consonants

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    4. Unit Four - Developing Style and Technique

    a. Problem(s): How does one develop their own style and technique?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Voice Limitations

    ii. Skills and Techniques of Style

    iii. Using Limitations to Form Personal Style and Technique

    iv. Improve Technique and Skills

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    5. Unit Five - Preparing Materials for Announcing

    a. Problem(s): How does an announcer prepare announcing materials?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Selecting Copy

    ii. Wire Service Copy

    iii. Interpreting Copy

    iv. Analyzing Punctuation

    v. Marking Copy

    vi. Phrasing Copy

    vii. Verifying Pronunciation

    viii. Reading Aloud

    ix. Conveying Interest

    x. Talking to the Listener

    xi. Employing Characterization

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    6. Unit Six - Various Announcing Techniques

    a. Problems(s): How do announcers techniques vary?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Straight Announcing, Commercials, Products, News Casting as MC, Sports, Interviews, Discussion, and Narrations

    ii. Correct Pronunciation, Articulation, and Voice Inflection

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    7. Unit Seven - Voice Acting and Repertoire of Characters

    a. Problem(s): How does one develop their own voice acting abilities?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Defining and Using Your Own Style

    ii. Types of Characters

    iii. Signature Voice

    iv. Voice Placement and Mouth Work

    v. Standard Character Development

    vi. Getting into Character

    vii. Keeping Character

    viii. Microphone Techniques

    ix. Using Headphones

    x. Dialects and Accents

    c. Skill Practice Assessment


    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1600 - Radio Broadcasting


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (replaces but does not equate to SPCH 1490) This course is designed to teach students the knowledge, values, sensitivity, and skills needed to work in the 21st century broadcasting industry with ethical and critical/creative thinking abilities. Developing, producing, and performing for commercial, dramatic, news and public affairs, sports, and global programming for use with the AM/FM, satellite radio, and podcasting on the Internet. Portfolio development projects included.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1460

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course the student will analyze various programming focusing on Production, Programming, and Performance.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Explain the role of the producer.
    2. Understand basic radio format.
    3. Explain sound engineering.
    4. Explain basic function of the mixing/production console.
    5. Explain recorded program productions.
    6. Explain live productions.
    7. Explain the role of the on‐air personality/talent
    8. Explain the types of microphones and their different applications.
    9. Explain how to create and produce a remote production.
    10. Explain how to create special effects, develop and record productions using one or more channels with a computer.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course the student will explain the convergence of AM/FM radio to new forms of media.

    Objectives: The student will be able to show the convergence and adaptation of AM/FM radio to:

    1. Satellite radio.
    2. Podcasting.
    3. Web Radio and other Internet uses.
    4. Expanding frontiers.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to create a written production plan for a variety of domestic and global radio program formats.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Systematize a schema for a production.
    2. Systematize a schema for a program.
    3. Systematize a schema for a performance.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course the student will create four productions using a podcasting format for their portfolios.

    Objectives: The student will be able to produce, program, and perform:

    1. A commercial production.
    2. A drama and dramatic element radio production.
    3. A news production.
    4. A remote and sports production.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Unit One - Basics of Radio

    a. Problem(s): What are the basic elements of radio programming?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Key terms and principles

    ii. Domestic and global audiences

    iii. Measuring an audience

    iv. Radio formats

    v. Regulations

    vi. Ethics

    vii. Role of producer

    viii. Role of the performer

    ix. Role of sound engineer

    x. Basic functions of mixing/production console

    xi. Types and uses of microphones

    xii. Recorded and live programming

    xiii. Remote productions

    xiv. Using the computer to edit, create special effects, and programming

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    d. Performance

    2. Unit Two - Convergence of AM/FM Radio with New Media

    a. Problem(s): What are the commercial and personal uses of the new Media?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Historical view of AM/FM radio

    ii. Satellite radio

    iii. Podcasting

    iv. Other Internet uses

    v. Future?

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    d. Performance

    3. Unit Three - Production Planning

    a. Problem(s): How does one produce, program, and perform various types of productions?

    b. Theory Base

    i. What is the process of production

    ii. What is the process of programming

    iii. What is the process of performing

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    d. Performance

    4. Unit Four - Podcast Portfolio Productions

    a. Problem(s): How does one produce podcast productions for domestic and global audiences using various programming formats?

    b. Theory Base

    i. Explanation of the IVAN Project

    ii. Commercial productions

    iii. Drama and dramatic elements productions

    iv. News productions

    v. Remote and sports productions

    c. Skill Practice Assessment

    d. Performance


    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean




    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1700 - Broadcast Television


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Learning theory and systems principles of live television broadcasting using multicamera production, camera composition and operation, studio roles and functions, and audio acquisitions presenting a basic adaptation of the script rundown to produce a live-to-tape television program. This course will also examine audience analysis, response, and evaluation. Portfolio Development Projects included.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1460

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of programming using the three steps of production: Pre‐Production, Production, and Post‐Production.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the three steps of production.
    2. Explain the roles of the writer and producer.
    3. Understand basic editing principles.
    4. Explain the differences between live to tape and live productions.
    5. Explain the differences between multi‐camera, Electronic Field Production (EFP), and film style shooting.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document knowledge of studio production as it relates to positions, direction, and camera composition.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss above‐the‐line positions.
    2. Discuss below‐the‐line positions.
    3. Discuss the role of the director.
    4. Discuss camera composition including the rule of thirds.
    5. Discuss camera directions.
    6. Discuss triangle‐lighting.
    7. Discuss audio recording techniques.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce a written production plan for a variety of studio productions.

    Objectives:

    1. Systematize a schema for a presentation.
    2. Systematize a schema for a production.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present and produce an entire program.

    Objectives:

    1. Produce an entire studio program from beginning to end using the methods of Pre‐Production, Production, and Post‐Production.
    2. Present a complete studio presentation and production.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
      2. Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups
    2. Unit One - Learning and Applying the Pre‐Production Stage
      1. Problem(s): How does it go from idea to script? How does it go from script to production?
      2. Theory Base:
        1. Key Terms and Principles
        2. Program Objective
        3. Role of the Writer
        4. Role of the Producer
        5. Role of the Director
        6. Above‐the‐line Positions
        7. Below‐the‐line Positions
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Two - Learning and Applying the Production Stage
      1. Problem: What are the most important skills?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Communicating Verbally
        2. Communicating Nonverbally
        3. Eye Contact
        4. Script Reading
        5. Presentation in Front of the Camera
        6. Camera Composition
        7. Camera Movement
        8. Role of the Producer
        9. Role of the Director
        10. Above‐the‐line Positions
        11. Below‐the‐line Positions
        12. Understanding Television Studio Equipment
        13. Understanding Microphones and Mixers
        14. Understanding Triangle‐Lighting
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Three - Learning and Applying the Post‐Production Stage
      1. Problem(s): How is the program put together?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Developing Editing Skills
        2. Understanding Live‐to‐Tape productions
        3. Understanding the Switcher (Video Mixer)
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. ASSESSMENTS

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 1800 - Broadcast Video


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Learning theory and systems principles of field production using film-style techniques, scriptwriting, performance, and editing to produce narratives and documentaries. This course will also examine audience analysis, response, and evaluation. Portfolio Development Projects included.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1460

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of programming using the three steps of production: Pre‐Production, Production, and Post‐Production.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the three steps of production.
    2. Explain the roles of the writer and producer.
    3. Understand basic editing principles.
    4. Explain the differences between multi‐camera, Electronic Field Production (EFP), and film style shooting.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document knowledge of field production as it relates to positions, direction, and camera composition.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the role of the director.
    2. Discuss camera composition including the rule of thirds.
    3. Discuss camera directions.
    4. Discuss film techniques.
    5. Discuss the various lighting techniques.
    6. Discuss audio recording techniques.
    7. Discuss the aspects of doing a remote Production.
    8. Understanding the differences between analog and digital video.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce a written production plan for a variety of field productions.

    Objectives:

    1. Systematize a schema for a performance/presentation.
    2. Systematize a schema for a production.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present and produce an entire program.

    Objectives:

    1. Produce an entire Field production program from beginning to end using the methods of Pre‐Production, Production, and Post‐Production.
    2. Present a completely edited field production/presentation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
      2. Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups
    2. Unit One - Learning and Applying the Pre‐Production Stage
      1. Problem(s): How does it go from idea to script? How does it go from script to production?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Key Terms and Principles
        2. Program Objective
        3. Role of the Writer
        4. Role of the Producer
        5. Role of the Director
        6. On‐Location Shoots
        7. Performance/Location Releases
        8. Storyboards
        9. Budgets
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Two - Learning and Applying the Production Stage
      1. Problem: What are the most important skills?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Communicating Verbally
        2. Communicating Nonverbally
        3. Eye Contact
        4. Script Reading
        5. Interviewing Skills
        6. Performance/Presentation in Front of the Camera
        7. Camera Composition
        8. Camera Movement
        9. Role of the Producer
        10. Role of the Director
        11. Understanding Film style shooting
        12. Understanding Field Equipment
        13. Understanding Audio Equipment
        14. Understanding Remote Lighting
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Three - Learning and Applying the Post‐Production Stage
      1. Problem(s): How is the program put together?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Developing Editing Skills
        2. Applying Graphics
        3. Applying Music and Background Sounds
        4. Understanding Room Tone
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. ASSESSMENTS

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2100 - Interpersonal Communication Relationships


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hours)
    (formerly SPCH 1100) A strong theory base is presented. It is followed by one-to-one communication skills, combined with experiences in verbal and non-verbal interaction. The theory focus is on message preparation, theories of interaction, the role of body language, current issues in relational communication dynamics, expressing emotions, understanding self-disclosure, and developing positive interpersonal relationships.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a skill base that will demonstrate “other” centeredness.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate “other” centeredness by giving attention to the conversational partner.
    2. Demonstrate “other” centeredness by showing interest in and concern for the conversational partner

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate improvement in communication interaction management.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate composure by modeling relaxed confidence.
    2. Demonstrate composure by modeling assertiveness.
    3. Demonstrate interaction management through turn taking, conversational initiation and conversational closings.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate personal control of verbal and nonverbal expressiveness.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate expressiveness through animation and variation in verbal and nonverbal forms of expression, including face, voice, body and gestures.
    2. Demonstrate appropriate language usage (avoiding excessive use of slang, vulgarisms, obscenities, and profanity).

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course the student will be able to identify and analyze facilitative and debilitative emotions.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to express facilitative emotions in a variety of context and situations
    2. Demonstrate the ability to express debilitative emotions and use coping mechanisms in a variety of contexts and situations.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate interactive communication models in a variety of contexts.

    1. Demonstrate ability in active listening with relational feedback.
    2. Demonstrate ability in conflict role management, problem solving and negotiating.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate interactive relational dynamics.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to interact and respond in an effective relational environment.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to identify and analyze “dispreferred” relational experiences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
    Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups

    1. Unit One - Philosophical Underpinnings
      1. Problem: What is Interpersonal Communication?
        1. Theory Base
          1. Key Terms and Principles
          2. Communication and Self
          3. Interpersonal Communication and Perception
          4. Interpersonal Communication and Intercultural Diversity
      2. Skill Practice Assessment
      3. Performance
    2. Unit Two - Learning Interpersonal Communication Skills
      1. Problem: What are the most important skills?
        1. Theory Base
          1. Listening and Responding
          2. Communicating Verbally
          3. Communicating Nonverbally
          4. Conflict Management Skills
      2. Skill Practice Assessment
      3. Performance
    3. Unit Three ‐ Emotions
      1. Problem: What is the difference between feeling and emotions?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Physiological factors
        2. Cultural Influences
        3. Self‐Disclosure
        4. Facilitative and Debilitative emotions
        5. Relating to Family, Friends, and Colleagues
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performances
    4. Unit Four - Applying Interpersonal Communication Skills to Interpersonal Relationships
      1. Problem(s): What is the cycle of relationships?
        1. Theory Base:
          1. Understanding Interpersonal Relationships
          2. Developing Interpersonal Relationships
          3. Relating to Family, Friends, and Colleagues
      2. Skill Practice Assessment
      3. Performance
    5. Post‐Assessment

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2110 - Persuasion


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    Analysis of persuasion in society. Ethical use of persuasion emphasized in preparation of persuasive talks for securing attention, minimizing hostility, and securing support for positions.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1060

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate skills based on the objectives of the Speech Communication Competency Speaker Criteria (NCA).

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate critical thinking by developing, listening to, analyzing and synthesizing issues, contentions, arguments and forms of support on a selected persuasive topic.
    2. Select a persuasive organizational pattern, thesis, specific purpose, and full sentence outline pattern which follow the conventions of standard written language in punctuation, grammar and spelling appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    3. Explain the communication theories associated with persuasion.
    4. Prepare a skill base that builds on the objectives from Speech 1060.
      1. Choose and narrow a topic appropriately.
      2. Use appropriate resources to find information.
      3. Demonstrate critical thinking.
      4. Select an organizational pattern appropriate to the topic.
      5. Provide appropriate ethical and cited supporting material.
      6. Use language and grammar that is appropriate.
      7. Use physical behaviors that support the verbal message.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document and recognize persuasive appeals in printed or transcribed mass media; as well as, create critically thought‐out, persuasive appeals in original presentations in an ethical manner.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate critical thinking by developing, listening to, analyzing and synthesizing issues, contentions, arguments and forms of support on a selected persuasive topic.
    2. Select a persuasive organizational pattern, thesis, specific purpose, and full sentence outline pattern which follow the conventions of standard written language in punctuation, grammar and spelling appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    3. Explain the communication theories associated with persuasion.
    4. Prepare a skill base that builds on the objectives from Speech 1060.
      1. Choose and narrow a topic appropriately.
      2. Use appropriate resources to find information.
      3. Demonstrate critical thinking.
      4. Select an organizational pattern appropriate to the topic.
      5. Provide appropriate ethical and cited supporting material.
      6. Use language and grammar that is appropriate.
      7. Use physical behaviors that support the verbal message.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce original presentations demonstrating use of persuasive organization patterns free of fallacious reasoning and manipulation.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate critical thinking by developing, listening to, analyzing and synthesizing issues, contentions, arguments and forms of support on a selected persuasive topic.
    2. Select a persuasive organizational pattern, thesis, specific purpose, and full sentence outline pattern which follow the conventions of standard written language in punctuation, grammar and spelling appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    3. Identify and label common fallacies used in persuasion.
    4. Report uses of media manipulation and persuasion.
    5. Describe the tactics of propaganda.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present extempore persuasive symposia to friendly and hostile audiences using media aids.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate critical thinking by developing, listening to, analyzing and synthesizing issues, contentions, arguments and forms of support on a selected persuasive topic.
    2. Select a persuasive organizational pattern, thesis, specific purpose, and full sentence outline pattern which follow the conventions of standard written language in punctuation, grammar and spelling appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    3. Identify and label common fallacies used in persuasion.
    4. Report uses of media manipulation and persuasion.
    5. Describe the tactics of propaganda.
    6. Prepare a skill base that builds on the objectives from Speech 1060.
      1. Choose and narrow a topic appropriately.
      2. Use appropriate resources to find information.
      3. Demonstrate critical thinking.
      4. Select an organizational pattern appropriate to the topic.
      5. Provide appropriate ethical and cited supporting material.
      6. Use language and grammar that is appropriate.
      7. Use physical behaviors that support the verbal message.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted oucomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. ASSESSMENTS
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
      2. Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups
    2. Unit One - Philosophical Underpinnings
      1. Problem: What basic principles must presenters of persuasion understand about persuasion in today’s world?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Contemporary Persuasion
          1. Ethics
          2. Research
          3. Symbols
          4. Tools for analyzing language
        2. Speaking with Confidence
        3. Critical Listening
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance
        1. Introductory Speech
        2. Historical Declamation
    3. Unit Two - Speaker’s Tool Box
      1. Problem: What tools and skills must persuasive public speakers use?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Audience Analysis
          1. Topic Selection
            1. General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Central Idea
            2. Preparation Outline, Speaking Outline
          2. Forms of Support: Rational and Dramatic
        2. Delivery: Use of voice‐breathing, phonation, articulation, pronunciation
        3. Use of Verbal: language, specificity, accuracy, vividness, appropriateness
        4. Use of Nonverbal: gestures, movement, facial expressions
        5. Media Aids: auditory and visual
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance
        1. Delivery Skills , Oral Skills
        2. One Point Speech
    4. Unit Three - Informative Speaking
      1. Problem(s): How does a public speaker prepare a speech to explain to an audience about a policy problem that needs changing using Monroe’s Motivated Sequence?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Audience Analysis
        2. General Principles of Learning
        3. Topic Selection
        4. General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Central Idea
        5. Preparation Outline, Speaking Outline
        6. Forms of Support‐definitions, illustrations, jokes, stories, facts, figures
        7. Delivery: Use of voice‐breathing, phonation, articulation, pronunciation
        8. Language: specificity, accuracy, vividness, appropriateness
        9. Nonverbal: gestures, movement, facial expressions
        10. Media aids: auditory and visual
        11. Research Skills
          1. Computer
          2. Books
          3. Journals
        12. Documentation (Modern Language Association - MLA)
        13. Connectives (Transitions and Signposts)
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance
        1. Interview Speech/Learning Bias
        2. Policy Speech using Monroe’s Motivated Sequence
    5. Unit Four - Theories of Persuasion
      1. Problem: What does the role of theory play in Persuasive Speaking?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Attitudes: Definition, Formation, and Measurement
        2. Attitude/Behavior Link
        3. Social Judgment Theory
        4. Consistency and Cognitive Dissonance Theory
        5. Self‐Perception Theory
        6. Theory of Reasoned Action
        7. Theory of Planned Behavior
        8. Elaboration Likelihood Model
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance
        1. Sales Speech
        2. Analysis of an Ad paper
    6. Unit Five - Persuasive Speaking; Persuasion Process
      1. Problem: How does a speaker prepare persuasive messages using a variety of models?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Source Factors
        2. Audience Analysis
        3. Message Factors: Content and Style
        4. Message Factors: Tactics and Strategies
        5. Receiver and Channel Factors
        6. Ethics
        7. Logical Reasoning and Argument
        8. General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Central Idea
        9. Research Skills Review
        10. Documentation Review
        11. Preparation Outline, Speaking Outline
        12. Significance, Inherency, Criteria Checklist, Plan and Planks
        13. Advantage, Solvency
        14. Forms of Support
        15. Connectives‐Transitions and Signposts
      3. Skill Practice Assessment: Videos and Exercises
      4. Performance
        1. Sympathetic Audience Speech
        2. Hostile Audience Speech
        3. Impromptu Speech
        4. Speech Criticism paper (Overview of Persuasive Campaign or Movement)
        5. Rhetorical Criticism paper
        6. Negotiation Exercises

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2300 - Intercultural Communication


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Intercultural communication is a course intended for those whose private or professional life includes encounters with people from cultures and co-cultures in the United States different from their own. Major theories and concepts are discussed and skills are practiced to sharpen real sensitivity and improved personal effectiveness when people of different cultures come together to share ideas, feelings, and information. Portfolio Development Projects included.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare an analysis of communication and culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Define culture and intercultural communication.
    2. Explain dominant American cultural patterns.
    3. Explain diverse cultural patterns.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document the exchange of intercultural messages.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss language and intercultural communication.
    2. Discuss language diversity.
    3. Discuss foreign language and translation.
    4. Discuss the importance of nonverbal communication.
    5. Classify nonverbal communication.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce plans for verbal and nonverbal communication strategies demonstrating cultural influences on various contexts.

    Objectives:

    1. Systematize a schema for a context.
    2. Systematize a schema for a culture.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present evidence of successful competent intercultural conversations.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the ability to record observations of non‐ participatory conversations using ethnographic constructs.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to record observations of participatory conversations using ethnographic constructs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
    2. Unit One - Foundations of Intercultural Communication
      1. Problem: Why study Intercultural Communication?
      2. Theory Base
        1. The Challenge of Intercultural Communication
        2. Contact
        3. Defining the terms: Culture, Communication, Context, and Power
        4. The Deep Structure of Culture
        5. Family
        6. History
        7. World View
        8. Cultural Explanations of Life and Death
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Two - Intercultural Communication Processes
      1. Problem: What are the skills necessary in the Intercultural Communication process?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Culture and the Individual: Cultural Identity
        2. Cultural Values
        3. Language and Culture: Words and Meaning
        4. Nonverbal Communication
        5. Nonverbal Codes
        6. Cultural Space
        7. Action
        8. Time
        9. Silence
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Three - Competent Intercultural Communication
      1. Problem: How does one become a competent Intercultural Communicator?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Philosophy of Change
        2. Language is an Open System
        3. Defining Intercultural Competence
        4. Basic Components of Communication Competence
        5. Understanding Intercultural Transitions
        6. Potential Problems in Intercultural Communication
        7. Improving Intercultural Communication
        8. Folk Culture, Popular Culture, and Intercultural Communication
        9. Culture, Communication, and Intercultural Relationships
        10. Culture, Communication, and Conflict
        11. Ethical Considerations
        12. Guidelines for an Intercultural Ethic
        13. The Future of Intercultural Communication
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. Unit Four - Intercultural Communication Applications
      1. Problem: What are the various cultural influences on the different contexts?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Culture and Context
        2. Communication and Context
        3. Assessing the Context
        4. Evolving Business Context
          1. Multi‐National Business Context
          2. Domestic Business Context
        5. Culture and Education
          1. Cultural Diversity and Education
          2. Education in a Multi‐Cultural Society
          3. Language Diversity and Multi‐Cultural Education
          4. Multi‐Cultural Competency in the Classroom
        6. Culture, Healthcare, and Communication
          1. Health Belief Systems
          2. Cultural Diversity and the Causes of Illness
          3. Cultural Diversity in the Treatment of Illness
          4. Cultural Diversity in the Prevention of Illness
          5. Religion, Spirituality, and Healthcare
        7. Skill Practice Assessment
        8. Service Learning
        9. Performance

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2400 - Communication in Organizations


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Communication theory in practice within organizational systems. This course demonstrates how communication is the key to organizational excellence, strategic communication in the workplace, and application of communication theory to create leadership competency. This course is especially designed for Speech Communication Majors and Minors, but is available to other majors.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to determine the behavior of various organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will explain the history of organizations.
    2. The student will define different theories of organizations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to summarize the basic flow of communication in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will explain the implications of major organizational theories.
    2. The student will identify both verbal and nonverbal messages in organizations.
    3. The student will explain the importance of work values, globalization, diversity, and ethics.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret the various formats of interaction in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will compare and contrast dyadic and group communication in organizations.
    2. The student will explain leadership and management communication.
    3. The student will evaluate problem solving models.
    4. The student will describe conflict processes and appraise which conflict process would be most appropriate for the context.
    5. The student will distinguish the various strategic organizational communication processes.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to suggest how an organization can change its communication when problems occur.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be able to plan and diagnose a change.
    2. The student will be able to develop a communication audit.
    3. The student will be able to suggest organizational change.
    4. The student will employ suggestions for using

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Unit One - The Behavior of Organizations
      1. Problem(s): Why study organizational communication?
      2. Theory Base
        1. The History of Organizations
        2. Different Types of Organizations
        3. The Theory of Organizations
        4. Organization Climate and Culture
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
    2. Unit Two - The Process of Communication
      1. Problem(s): Why study the flow of communication in organizations?
      2. Theory Base
        1. The Process of Communication
        2. Implications of Major Organizational Theories
        3. Creating and Exchanging Verbal Messages in Organizations
        4. Creating and Exchanging Nonverbal Messages in Organizations
        5. Work Values, Globalization, Diversity, and Ethics
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
    3. Unit Three - Formats of Interaction of Organizational Communication
      1. Problem(s): How do organizations differ in interaction formats?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Dyadic Organizational Communication
        2. Groups in Organizations
        3. Leadership and Management Communication
        4. Communication Competencies, Barriers, and Problem Solving Models
        5. Defining and Describing Conflict Processes
        6. Negotiation, Mediation, Arbitration, and Facilitation
        7. Strategic Organizational Communication
    4. Unit Four - Organizational Communication Problems, Diagnosis and Change
      1. Problem(s): How does organizational communication change when it has problems?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Planning, Diagnosing, and Change
        2. Implementing an Diagnosis: Communication Audit
        3. Implementing Organizational Change
        4. Communicating Changed

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2550 - Argumentation Debate


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly SPCH 2500) This course instructs the student in the preparation of resolutions and the development of arguments, evaluation of reasoning including fallacies, and evidence applied to writing formal briefs. Students will use oral communication principles and practices to apply skill for participation in various forms of debate.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1060

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present skills based on the objectives of the National Communication Competency Speaking Criteria (NCA).

    Objectives:

    1. Provide appropriate oral/written ethical and cited supporting material.
    2. Use language and grammar appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion and context.
    3. Use pronunciation, articulation, and vocal variety in rate, pitch, and intensity to heighten and maintain interest.
    4. Use physical behaviors that support the verbal message.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking.

    Objectives:

    1. Create classical structures of argument showing evidence of types of reasoning.
    2. Identify obstacles to clear thinking including fallacies.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to research policy resolutions.

    Objectives:

    1. Choose, narrow, and write a policy resolution for debate appropriately for the audience and the occasion.
    2. Use the resources of the library, expert interviews, and personal experience to obtain information to formulate into evidence cards to be used in structuring arguments.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare argumentative, affirmative and negative briefs on a selected policy topic.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate critical thinking analysis of the proposition through issues, contentions, arguments, evidence, and proofs applied to affirmative briefs including cases in logical outline style.
    2. Demonstrate critical thinking analysis of the proposition through issues, contentions, arguments, evidence, and proofs applied to negative briefs including cases in logical outline style.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE:

    Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
    Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups

    1. Unit One - Philosophical Underpinnings
      1. Problem: How are argumentation, critical thinking, and debate used in various forms of decision making?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Definition of Debate
        2. Definition of Critical Thinking
        3. Critical Thinking in a Free Society
        4. Foundation of Debate
        5. Ethical Standards of Debate
        6. Applied and Academic Debate
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    2. Unit Two - Reasoning
      1. Problem: What are the foundations of argument?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Classical Tradition
        2. Classical Structures of Argument
        3. Formal Validity
        4. Types of Reasoning
        5. Obstacles to Clear Thinking
        6. Fallacies of Evidence
        7. Fallacies of Reasoning
        8. Fallacies of Language
        9. Fallacies of Pseudo Arguments
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Three - Ethics of Argumentation
      1. Problem: What does it mean to use ethical and cultural consideration in argumentation and debate?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Ethics
        2. Applied Ethics
        3. Culture
        4. Cultural Studies
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Four - Debate Proposition
      1. Problem: How does one create and analyze a debate proposition?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Define the controversy
        2. Phrase the Debate Proposition
        3. Types of Debate Propositions
        4. Presumption
        5. Burden of Proof
        6. Defining Terms
        7. Methods of Defining Terms
        8. Issues
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. Unit Five - Evidence and Proof
      1. Problem: What consists of good evidence and proof?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Definition of Evidence
        2. Definition of Proof
        3. Sources of Evidence
        4. Types of Evidence
        5. Test of Credible Evidence
        6. Tests of Audience Acceptability
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    6. Unit Six - Supporting Materials for Debate
      1. Problem: How does one explore the controversy and provide supporting material?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Review and Generate Ideas
        2. Research Process
        3. Reading with a Purpose
        4. Reading Critically
        5. Recording Materials ‐ Cards
        6. Organizing Materials ‐ Briefs
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    7. Unit Seven - Developing the Affirmative Case
      1. Problem: How does one argue for the proposition
      2. Theory Base
        1. Requirements of the Affirmative Case
        2. Proposition of the Affirmative Cases
        3. Proposition of Policy Affirmative Cases
        4. Plan Format - Planks of Affirmative Cases
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    8. Unit Eight - Developing the Negative Case
      1. Problem: How does one argue for the proposition
      2. Theory Base
        1. Requirements of the Negative Case
        2. Proposition of the Negative Cases
        3. Proposition of Policy Negative Cases
        4. Plan Format - Planks of Negative Cases
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    9. Unit Nine - Debate Styles
      1. Problem: How does one debate the different styles of debate?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Lincoln‐Douglas
        2. Cross‐Examination
        3. Political Campaign Debate
        4. Public Debating
        5. Parliamentary Procedure
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    10. Unit Ten - Refutation and Rebuttal
      1. Problem: How does one refute and rebut
      2. Theory Base
        1. Burden of Rebuttal
        2. Place of Refutation
        3. Preparing for Refutation
        4. Structure of Refutation
        5. Methods of Refutation
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    11. Unit Eleven - Communication Skills of Debate
      1. Problem:
      2. Theory Base
        1. Effective Listening
        2. Dealing with Public Speaking Anxiety
        3. Review of the Elements of Effective Public Speaking
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    12. Unit Twelve ‐ Evaluation
      1. Problem: Who won and how?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Evaluating the Debate
          1. Judges
          2. Philosophies
          3. Ballots
        2. Academic Debate Formats
          1. Town Hall Format
          2. Long Table Format
      3. Web Debates
      4. Skill Practice Assessment
      5. Performance

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2600 - Public Relations Communication


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Communication practices and principles of public relations. Relate with various publics using surveys, media, writing, and creating events. Establish good relations with employees and community using tried methods. Principles of avoiding and responding to emergencies.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: SPCH-1060

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present skills based on the objectives of the Speech Communication Competency Speaker Criteria (NCA).

    Objectives:

    1. Relate the three standards against which public relations effectiveness is measured: ethical, social responsibility, and financial responsibility to determine the moral and immoral approaches to audiences and messages.
    2. Use language and grammar in writing that is appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    3. Use the Speech Communication Competency Speaker Criteria (NCA) for: pronunciation, articulation, and vocal variety in rate, pitch, and intensity to heighten and maintain interests as well as physical behaviors that support the verbal message (builds on the objectives from Speech 1060).

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document their public relations research and methods.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function of public relations in organizations indicating the trends that shape the growth and development of public relations as a management function and as a profession different from publicity, press agentry, promotion, advertising, marketing, and merchandising.
    2. Explain how public relations practitioners use research to define problems, develop plans to solve them, implement those plans and evaluate the results of their programs and campaigns.
    3. Develop the ability to discriminate among a variety of research methods and to determine which are most applicable to particular stage of the public relations process.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce research analysis, campaign plans, and evaluation procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Relate the three standards against which public relations effectiveness is measured: ethical, social responsibility, and financial responsibility to determine the moral and immoral approaches to audiences and messages.
    2. Use language and grammar in writing that is appropriate to the topic, audience, occasion, and context.
    3. Use the Speech Communication Competency Speaker Criteria (NCA) for: pronunciation, articulation, and vocal variety in rate, pitch, and intensity to heighten and maintain interests as well as physical behaviors that support the verbal message (builds on the objectives from Speech 1060).
    4. Describe the function of public relations in organizations indicating the trends that shape the growth and development of public relations as a management function and as a profession different from publicity, press agentry, promotion, advertising, marketing, and merchandising.
    5. Explain how public relations practitioners use research to define problems, develop plans to solve them, implement those plans and evaluate the results of their programs and campaigns.
    6. Identify the tasks involved in managing the public relations function: managing client relationships, overseeing creative staff, and establishing a schedule of fees for services rendered.
    7. Demonstrate the technical skill and knowledge of producing a variety of publicity materials including publications, print and video news releases, news conferences, media interviews, promotions, and special events.
    8. Demonstrate the technical skill and knowledge necessary to use a R‐A‐C‐E formula to create a public relations campaign.
    9. Develop a public relations flexible crisis plan prepared in advance.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present campaign programs demonstrating ability to perform public relations management functions.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function of public relations in organizations indicating the trends that shape the growth and development of public relations as a management function and as a profession different from publicity, press agentry, promotion, advertising, marketing, and merchandising.
    2. Explain how public relations practitioners use research to define problems, develop plans to solve them, implement those plans and evaluate the results of their programs and campaigns.
    3. Identify the tasks involved in managing the public relations function: managing client relationships, overseeing creative staff, and establishing a schedule of fees for services rendered.
    4. Demonstrate the technical skill and knowledge of producing a variety of publicity materials including publications, print and video news releases, news conferences, media interviews, promotions, and special events.
    5. Demonstrate the technical skill and knowledge necessary to use a R‐A‐C‐E formula to create a public relations campaign.
    6. Develop a public relations flexible crisis plan prepared in advance.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    1. Assessments Theory of Group Work
      1. Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
    2. Unit One - Public Relations: Role, History and Futuristic Concerns
      1. Problem: What is the role of public relations communication in the workplace?
      2. Theory Base
        1. The realities of Public Relations
        2. P.R.’s Origins and Evaluation
        3. P.R. Trends
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Two - Research for P.R.
      1. Problem: How does a practitioner…?
        1. Learn about publics and public opinions
        2. Research for a background to plan
        3. Research processes, procedures and techniques
      2. Theory Base
        1. Identify and describe publics
        2. Research media
        3. Determine issues
        4. Measure public opinion
        5. Research sources
        6. Using research for planning and monitoring
        7. Research processes, procedures and techniques
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Three - Theory, Ethics, and Laws Affecting P.R. Practice
      1. Problem(s): What do practitioners need to know to practice public relations?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Persuasion and communication theories
        2. P.R. ethics and responsibilities
        3. P.R. and the law
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. Unit Four - Public Relations in Action
      1. Problem: What is the work of a public relations practitioner?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Problem solving strategies
        2. Communication channels and media
        3. Tactics and techniques: Details that make P.R. Strategies work
        4. Campaigns
        5. Crisis Management
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Service Learning
      5. Performance
    6. Post Assessment

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2700 - Change, Conflict, & Crisis Communication


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Designed for professionals in leadership whose responsibilities include dealing with diversity, change, conflict, and crisis. This course centers on the change process and agents, intercultural competition and issues, and diffusion campaigns. Students participate in crisis communication planning and conflict resolution strategies, tactics, and exercises. (For employer-employee labor issues see the Labor-Management offerings.)

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify factors in the change process so that they can develop and implement a plan using diffusion theory.

    Objectives:

    1. Diagnose a communication problem.
    2. Demonstrate the comprehension of the role of a change agent.
    3. Identify the sources of resistance within a social system.
    4. Construct reasoned arguments and strategies for introducing a diffusion campaign.
    5. Assess the results of a campaign.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and distinguish how conflict occurs and the role that communication plays in its development, management, or resolution.

    Objectives:

    1. Define conflict and the spiral of conflict.
    2. Indicate different types of goals in conflict.
    3. Recognizing the effect of power on conflict.
    4. Differentiate between constructive and destructive communication.
    5. Chart conflict assessment.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to enhance pertinent communication and interactive skills in order to provide each participant with a degree of competence in managing conflict/disagreement situations effectively at an interpersonal level.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate competitive approaches.
    2. Demonstrate collaborative approaches.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the principles/concepts of conflict management to the broader context of organizational, cultural, and/or global levels in order to provide insights into current events, which impact the individual in today’s workplace.

    Objectives:

    1. Be able to identify alternative dispute resolutions in current events.
    2. Be able to identify third party intervention in current events: mediation, arbitration, facilitation.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assess the ethical implications of given behaviors in a given context.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the context.
    2. Suggest verbal and non-verbal behavior.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand the anatomy of a crisis.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify crisis typology.
    2. List the stages of a crisis.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a Crisis Plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Planning.
    2. Crisis Event.
    3. Recovering from a Crisis.
    4. Evaluation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Analyzing the Change Process
    2. Organizational Communication and Leading Changes
    3. Designing the Diffusion Theory Plan
    4. Anatomy of a Conflict
    5. Intercultural and International Conflict Communication
    6. Interpersonal Communication and Conflict Management
    7. Competitive and Collaborative Approaches to Communication
    8. Anatomy of a Crisis
    9. Crisis Communication
    10. Designing a Crisis Communication Plan

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2800 - Interpretative Performance Communication


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Interpretative reading of prose, poetry, and drama: single and multiple readings, chamber and reader’s theater, storytelling. Children’s literature, old masters, traditional and contemporary works read from manuscript to achieve interaction of the reader, listener, and material. Develops proficiency in oral reading per individual need (i.e., presentations, announcing, acting, etc.). Portfolio Development Projects included.

    Prerequisites:
    None

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare ethical sources of garnered, appropriate literature for the purpose of analysis and performance of the literary text.

    Objectives:

    1. Identifies the types of literature suitable for reading aloud (prose, poetry, drama, declamations, short stories, children’s literature, essays, and novels).
    2. Demonstrates the skill of ethical responsibility by properly documenting literature to prevent plagiarism or confusion.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to document skills in analyzing the literary text to convey the meaning of the author, or original works.

    Objectives:

    1. Identifies the skills that are necessary to analyze a literary selection that includes the overall theme, purpose, focal point, point of view, structure, organization, and characterizations.
    2. Discover meanings and emotions through imagery, emphasis, pause, intensity, intonation, denotation, and connotation.
    3. Provides a detailed analysis of the literature to demonstrate an understanding of literature.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce/rehearse with sensitivity analyzed selections in character(s) for a planned performance program for specific audiences.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate how to plan a program for performance with the sender (performer), text (message) receiver (audience) in mind. Elements of time, variety capability, purpose, and overall value will be considered.
    2. Demonstrate how to use various reading formats: solo, duo, group, choral, reader’s theater, chamber theater, storytelling, and narration.
    3. Demonstrate ethical responsibility by enhancing cultural awareness and avoiding ethnocentrism.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present featured material to a selected audience.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform/direct an interpretive piece/program before an audience.
    2. Enhance the speaking voice by using vocal qualities such as volume, pitch, rate, tone, inflection, pronunciation, articulation, dialect, and vocal variety.
    3. Use the appropriate nonverbal skills (kinesics) for a competent delivery.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    TEACHING MODEL: THEORY, SKILL PRACTICE, SKILL PERFORMANCE

    Assessments Theory of Group Work
    Forming, Norming, Storming, Performing Model
    Formation of Cooperative Learning Groups

    Outline based on Multiple Sources

    1. Unit One - Basic Principles
      1. Problem(s): What are the basic principles an interpreter performer needs to know?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Historical
        2. Engaging an Audience
        3. Involves Literary Work
        4. Requires Analysis of the Selection
        5. Consideration of Structural Components
        6. Consideration of Aesthetic Components
        7. Requires Rehearsal
        8. Relaxation Technique
        9. Breath Control
        10. Volume and Projection
        11. Pitch and Quality
        12. Rate and Pause
        13. Dialect
        14. Technique
        15. Posture
        16. Gesture
        17. Imagery
        18. Eye Contact
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    2. Unit Two - Interpretation of Prose
      1. Problem(s): How does an interpreter present prose?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Style
        2. Types
        3. Narration
        4. Point of View
        5. Action and Plot
        6. Dialogue
        7. Creating Character
        8. Setting
        9. Cutting and Excerpting
        10. Analyzing and Rehearsing
        11. Performance
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    3. Unit Three - Interpretation of Drama
      1. Problem(s): How does an interpreter perform drama?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Difference between Acting and Interpretation
        2. Elements of a Play
        3. Analyzing the Scene
        4. Rhythm
        5. Style
        6. Scenography
        7. Properties
        8. Characters
        9. Coordinating Voice and Body
        10. Physical Contact
        11. Physical Focus
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    4. Unit Four - Interpretation of Poetry
      1. Problem(s): How does an interpreter present poetry?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Classification of Poetry
        2. Figurative Language
        3. Poetic Syntax
        4. Tone Color
        5. Titles
        6. Analysis and Poems
        7. Kinds of Verse
        8. Stanza
        9. Line
        10. Cadences
        11. Rhyme
        12. Intention and Performance
        13. Analyzing the Rehearsal/Performance
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance
    5. Unit Five - Group Performance of Literature
      1. Problem(s): How does one perform in group interpretation?
      2. Theory Base
        1. Readers Theatre
        2. Chamber Theatre
        3. Film Scripts
        4. Concrete Poetry
        5. Building and Presenting a Program
      3. Skill Practice Assessment
      4. Performance

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SPCH 2850 - Speech Communication Capstone Course


    Credit Hours: 1.00
    (1 contact hr)
    Taken during the last semester of the major or the certificate program, the course will assist the student in preparing the professional portfolio and will give the student information and assistance in developing a resume/interview. In addition, the course will give students assistance as they prepare to transfer. At the last session, the instructor will invite potential local employers.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: Registered Speech Communication major with 35 hours in SPCH courses and consent of Program Advisor.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present a professional career plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Sequence a pattern.
    2. List alternatives.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present a professional portfolio.

    Objectives:

    1. Per his/her concentration, skill evidence of oral presentation skills.
    2. Per his/her concentration, skill evidence of writing skills.
    3. Per his/her concentration, skill evidence of critical/creative thinking.
    4. Per his/her concentration, skill evidence of media skill.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present a professional resumé.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop a professional resumé format.
    2. Enter personal data.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interact in an effective interview.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate effective nonverbal skills.
    2. Demonstrate effective verbal skills.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review of General Principle of Communication
    2. Review of Specialties
    3. Certification
    4. Assessment of Career Plans
    5. Assessment of Portfolios
    6. Assessment of Resumes
    7. Assessment of Interview Question/Answers
    8. Senior College Information
    9. Seeking Internships
    10. Seeking Part-time Employment
    11. Seeking Full-time Employment

    Primary Faculty
    McKenney, Janet
    Secondary Faculty
    Fox, Janice
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Steam

  
  • ATSS 1150 - Steam - Heat Fundamentals


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Basic physics concepts such as force, pressure, work, energy, matter, heat, temperature, transfer and effect of heat, expansion and contraction of solids and liquids, heat phenomena of gases, melting and freezing of substances, vaporization, and steam and other vapors. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: ATAM-1150 or ATAM-1350

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the three modes of heat transfer, conduction, connection and radiation.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize to an accuracy of 70% the conduction type of heat transfer.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize to an accuracy of 70% the convection type of heat transfer.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize to an accuracy of 70% the radiation type of heat transfer.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the three types of heat.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize to an accuracy of 70% sensible heat.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize to an accuracy of 70% latent heat.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize to an accuracy of 70% specific heat.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to define the British Thermal Unit (BTU).

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will, to an accuracy of 70%, recognize the definition of the BTU.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will, to an accuracy of 70%, relate BTU with sensible heat.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will, to an accuracy of 70%, relate BTU with latent heat.
    4. Given final exam questions, the student will, to an accuracy of 70%, relate BTU with specific heat.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the effects of heat upon solids, liquids, and gases.

    Objectives:

    1. On final exam questions, the student will match the specific heat, to an accuracy of 70%, given a list of solid materials.
    2. On final exam questions, the student will match the specific heat, to an accuracy of 70%, given a list of liquids.
    3. On final exam questions, the student will match the specific heat, to an accuracy of 70%, given a list of gases.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Force, Work, Energy, and Power
    2. Matter, Heat, and Temperature
    3. Source of Heat
    4. Heat Measurement
    5. Transfer of Heat
    6. Effects of Heat
    7. Expansion of Solids and Liquids
    8. Heat Phenomena of Gases - Boyle’s Law
    9. Charles’ Law
    10. Guy Lussac’s Law
    11. Melng and Freezing
    12. Vaporizaon

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATSS 1160 - Steam ­ Steam Boilers (Low & High Pressure Operations)


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Covers firetube, watertube, and package boilers, and their appurtenances. Includes boiler operation and safety in firing oil, gas, stokers and pulverized fuels. Explains requirements for good combustion and how to maintain them. Also includes maintenance and repair procedures on the boiler proper including tubes, fans, air preheater, superheater and economizers with stress on proper selection of materials and their location. Auxiliaries such as coal pulverizers and coal burners. South Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: ATSS­-1150 or ATAM­-1150, or consent of apprenticeship coordinator or related work experience

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the difference between fire tube boilers and water tube boilers.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a picture/drawing and/or final exam questions, the student will recognize a fire tube boiler, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a picture/drawing and/or final exam questions, the student will recognize a water tube boiler, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the difference between high pressure boilers and low pressure boilers.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize a low‐pressure boiler, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize a high‐pressure boiler, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the various boiler appurtenances.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will recognize the boiler safety valves, pressure gages, water gage set, low water and feed assemblies, and blow down valve, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a boiler drawing, the student will locate the boiler safety valves, pressure gages, water gage set, low water and feed assemblies, and blow down valve, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will describe the maintenance of the boiler safety valves, pressure gages, water gage set, low water and feed assemblies, and blow down valve, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to pass the typical boiler operators test.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of sample test questions, the student will research and find the correct answers, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given a set of sample test questions, the student will answer, without any aids, all questions, to an accuracy of 70%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Review of the Course Boiler Theory and Operation
    2. Boiler Construction and Design
    3. Steam Systems and Controls
    4. Water Supply Systems and Controls
    5. Water Treatment Systems and Controls
    6. Fuel Systems and Controls
    7. Dra├ and Flue Gas Systems
    8. Boiler Operations and Maintenance
    9. Field Trip to Boiler Room ‐ Boiler Layout and Piping
    10. High and Low Pressure Boiler Applications
    11. Piping Design and Installation
    12. Steam Piping Problems and Course Review

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Surgical Technology

  
  • SURG 1050 - Introduction to Surgical Technology


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course provides an introduction to the allied health profession of surgical technology. Students will learn about the history, professional associations related to, and the role and responsibilities of the surgical technologist. Additional topics include an introduction to the patient including the biopsychosocial needs of the patient, and death and dying. Ethical, moral and legal issues will be explored and examined. Students will learn about regulatory agencies, healthcare facilities, as well as departmental organization and management within the facilities. The physical environment of the operating room will be introduced, and students will learn about various emergency situations and all hazard preparation in the healthcare setting. Center Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730 with grade C or better Prerequisite: HHSC-1700 with grade C or better
    Corequisite: SURG-1060
    Corequisite: SURG-1070

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to list duties including the role and responsibilities of the surgical technologist.

    Objectives:

    1. Trace the historical development of surgery and surgical technology.
    2. Identify and interpret a job description for the surgical technologist.

    Outcome 2:
    Identify various employment and career opportunities for surgical technologists.

    Objectives:

    1. List employment opportunities for surgical technologists.
    2. Discuss the types of healthcare settings surgical technologists are usually employed.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between various surgical team members and their responsibilities.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify members of the surgical team and their roles.
    2. Explain and define the OR team members.
    3. List the duties and responsibilities of the scrub surgical technologist.
    4. List the duties and responsibilities of the surgical technology in the assistant circulator role.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the basic physical, spiritual and cultural needs of the patient.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs.
    2. Distinguish and assess the physical, spiritual, and biopsychosocial needs of a patient.
    3. Distinguish and assess cultural and religious influences on the surgical patient.
    4. Describe the general needs associated with special populations of surgical patients.
    5. Evaluate attitudes, beliefs and classifications regarding death and dying.

    Outcome 5:
    Comprehend the physical environment of the operating room.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe hazards to the patient in the operative environment.
    2. List the principles in design for the OR suite.
    3. Identify the role of the surgical technology in the protection of self, patients, and others from hazards in the operative environment.
    4. Demonstrate knowledge of environmental systems, controls and environmental safety.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish various types of healthcare facilities, management and departmental organization.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify different types of health care facilities.
    2. Describe a typical healthcare facility organizational structure and management.
    3. Describe an organizational chart.
    4. Identify hospital departments and their relationship to surgical services.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to comprehend moral, ethical, risk management and legal issues.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the principles of documentation in the health care environment.
    2. Define and interpret ethical, moral and legal responsibilities.
    3. Discuss professional standards of conduct.
    4. Define basic concepts of ethical and moral decision making and issues.
    5. Demonstrate an understanding of common legal terms used in the health care environment.
    6. Identify patient’s rights related to healthcare.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and employ strategies for successful and effective communication in the field of surgical technology.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and demonstrate principles of communication in the surgical setting.
    2. Identify the various methods of effective communication problem solving and conflict management and resolution.
    3. Define professional and personal attributes.
    4. Explain effective listening and interpersonal skills.
    5. Define environmental systems and controls and safety terms associated with the operating room.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all hazards preparation and the role of various agencies and health care workers during national, manmade or combination disasters.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe communication strategies and procedures used during a disaster.
    2. Describe the role of triage procedures during various disasters.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit I. Orientation to Surgical Technology
    History of surgery
    Duties, roles and responsibilities of the surgical team members
    Professional and personal attributes for success
    Effective communication skills and teamwork
    Methods of communication, problem solving and conflict management
    Employability skills
    Healthcare facilities , organizational structure and management
    Professional regulatory agencies

    Unit II. The Surgical Patient/Ethical Moral, Risk Management and Legal Issues
    Legal, ethical and moral Issues
    Physical, spiritual, and biopsychosocial needs of the patient
    Rights of the health care consumer
    Special populations patients
    Elements of documentation in the health care setting

    Unit III. Physical Environment and Safety Standards
    Principles of operating room design
    Environmental systems and controls
    Environmental safety

    Unit IV. All - Hazards Preparation
    Disasters and public health emergencies
    Disasters planning
    Methods of communication
    Disaster support services
    Emergency operations planning


    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1051 - Introduction to Surgical Patient Care Techniques


    Credit Hours: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    SURG-1051 introduces students to the environment of the operating room with an emphasis on patient safety and on the standards of care required for the surgical patient. This course includes pre-surgical testing and basic and special diagnostic and laboratory studies performed to determine patient diagnosis. Students will be introduced to special equipment used in the operating room. Additional topics include preoperative preparation of the patient, transport, transfer, positioning, catheterization, routine skin preparation, and draping. Types of surgical incisions, exposure, hemostasis, wound closure techniques, sutures, needles, stapling devices, tissue replacement materials, wound management, factors influencing wound healing, dressings and drains will be identified. Center Campus.

    Corequisites:
    SURG-1200, SURG-1250, SURG-1260
    Prerequisites:
    Admission into the Surgical Technology program; ENGL-1180 or ENGL-1210; BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730; BIOL-2710; HHSC-1700; SURG-1050; SURG-1060; SURG-1070 and current proof of American Heart Association (AHA)/BLS certification

     


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify various specialty equipment utilized in the operating room.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify types of special equipment utilized in OR practice and demonstrate proper care, handling techniques, and safety precautions.
    2. Describe the application of thermoregulatory devices.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify diagnostic studies performed on patients used to assist to determine diagnosis of the patient.

    Objectives:

    1. List and discuss laboratory tests and diagnostic procedures used to establish patient diagnosis.
    2. Determine how diagnostic studies impact surgical intervention.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the various types of wounds and factors influencing wound healing.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the 4 classifications of wounds.
    2. Describe the characteristics of inflammation.
    3. Identify the phases of wound healing.
    4. Identify factors influencing wound healing.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify sutures, needles, and stapling devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the types, characteristics, and uses of natural and synthetic absorbable suture materials.
    2. Identify suture materials and stapling devices and their uses.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the various incisions performed for optimum exposure for surgical procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic surgical incisions, principles of exposure, and tissue layers associated with each incision.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify preoperative preparation of the patient skin preparation solutions and techniques of patient skin preparation for surgery.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the principles of urinary catheterization and demonstrate the procedure.
    2. Understand the methods of preparation of the operative site for surgery.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify proper techniques in patient positioning for various types of surgical procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, describe, and demonstrate the principles of transportation and transfer of the surgical patient.
    2. Discuss, demonstrate, and apply the principles of surgical positioning.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    UNIT I. General Patient Care and Safety
    Pre-surgical testing, diagnostic and laboratory tests
    Preoperative preparation of the patient
    Patient transfer
    Urinary catheterization
    Patient positioning
    Prepping or the operative site

    UNIT II. Wound Management
    Incisions
    Wound healing
    Sutures
    Needles
    Stapling devices
    Care of specimens
    Wound drains
    Dressings
    Catheters
    Collection devices

    UNIT III. Specialty Equipment
    Lasers
    Microscopes
    Suction
    Principles of Electricity
    ESU
    Diagnostic procedures


    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1060 - Orientation to Central Processing Distribution Technician


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course introduces students to the central sterile processing department and role and responsibilities of the central processing distribution technician. Topics include infection control, decontamination, disinfection, assembly, inspection, and preparation and packaging of instruments and other items for sterilization. Students will also learn about the principles of sterile storage, distribution inventory control, and information technology. Center Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730 with grade C or better Prerequisite: HHSC-1700 with grade C or better
    Corequisite: SURG-1050
    Corequisite: SURG-1070

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the role of the Central Processing Distribution Technician (CPDT).

    Objectives:

    1. List the function, role and responsibilities of the central processing distribution technician.
    2. Participate in team player concepts.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify career opportunities for Central Processing Distribution Technicians (CPDT).

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss career opportunities Certified Registered Central Service Technicians (CRCST).
    2. Identify advantages of membership and certification through the International Association of Healthcare Central Service Material Management (IAHCSMM).

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss safety and legal aspects involved in the care of patients in the health care system.

    Objectives:

    1. Review basic policies and procedures of central service departments.
    2. Discuss the importance of the control of contamination and the environment.
    3. Identify elements of risk management.
    4. Discuss the importance of following directions.
    5. Discuss methods of handling infections wastes and potential hazardous sources.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to comprehend aseptic technique, theories and practices of the central service department.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the prevalence of microorganisms and how they affect practices in the Central Services Department.
    2. Describe the purpose of the design and workflow of the central service department.
    3. Discuss aseptic technique and methods of sterilization.
    4. Discuss the biologic testing for various methods of sterilization.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to review basic microbiology, human anatomy and physiology.

    Objectives:

    1. Review the basics of human anatomy and physiology.
    2. Define and discuss terms related to microbiology and infection control.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate infection control, decontamination, and terminal sterilization.

    Objectives:

    1. Define and discuss terms related to microbiology and infection control.
    2. Discuss and evaluate methods of decontamination.
    3. List and discuss the process and methods of sterilization.
    4. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of various methods of sterilization
    5. Identify a procedure for cleaning, inspecting and replacing surgical instruments.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design a plan of action for preparation and packaging for sterilization.

    Objectives:

    1. Accurately perform instrument tray assembly.
    2. Identify common instrumentation.
    3. Discuss the purpose of internal and external indicators.
    4. Demonstrate wrapping techniques for sterilization.
    5. Identify various packaging materials.
    6. Discuss preparation and precautions for various methods of sterilization.
    7. Design a plan of action to sterilize instruments.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze sterile storage, distribution and inventory control.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper technique in rotating, storing, handling and distribution and inventory control.

    Outcome 9:
    Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate knowledge of uses of computerized information technology systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the value of computerized information systems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit I. Introduction to Central Service
    Career and employment opportunities
    International Association of Healthcare Central Service Material Management (IAHCSMM) membership and certification
    Protocol for environmental and safety hazards
    Documentation and risk management
    Components of effective communication

    Unit II. Human Anatomy and Physiology
    Anatomy and physiology relates to the work performed in the sterile processing department
    Anatomy, physiology, and function of the body systems

    Unit III. Microbiology and Infection Control
    Pathogenic microorganisms
    Characteristics, classifications and descriptions of bacteria
    Organisms causing the majority of hospital acquired infections
    Hand washing in controlling infections
    Modes of bacterial are transmission

    Unit IV. Decontamination
    Workflow in decontamination
    Personal protective equipment (PPE) and impervious attire
    Ultrasonic machines and washer decontaminator
    Standard precautions
    Disinfectants and antiseptics
    Cleaning and processing specialized instruments and equipment

    Unit V. Instrumentation
    Categories names and uses of surgical instruments
    Types of finishes and materials used to make instruments
    Parts of an instrument
    Instrument inspection and testing for malfunctions

    Unit VI. Preparation and Packaging for Sterilization
    Prepackaging inspection of instruments
    Preparation and packaging of instruments for sterilization
    Instrument tray count sheet
    Principles of packaging and w rapping techniques
    Integrity of sterile packaging
    Types of packaging materials

    Unit VII. Sterilization
    Principles, concepts and methods of sterilization
    Principles, concepts and methods of disinfection
    Methods of sterilization
    Handling of sterile supplies
    Lot control and traceability
    Care and maintenance of sterilizers

    Unit VIII. Sterile Storage
    Labeling, stock arrangement, rotation, and shelf life
    Sources of contamination of sterile supplies
    Discuss maintaining product sterility
    Handling and inspection of sterile sup plies

    Unit IX. Distribution
    Monitoring and measuring inventory control and performance

    Unit X. Information Technology
    Impact of computers and information systems on the management and operation of Material Management and Central Service
    Functions and capabilities of computers and information systems
    Analyze the uses of computerized information systems compared to manual systems and how they impact productivity, efficiency and overall management of operations


    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1070 - Central Processing Distribution Technician Clinical


    Credit Hours: 8.00
    (24 contact hrs per week for 16 wks)
    In the lab and clinical setting, SURG-1070 students are exposed to all areas of the central service department and actively participate as a member of the central service department. Students will perform cleaning, decontamination, processing (inspection, assembly, and packaging). Students will learn operation of sterilizer, and distribution of patient care supplies and equipment. This clinical meets three eight-hour days per week. Students must provide their own transportation. Center Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730 with grade C or better Prerequisite: HHSC-1700 with grade C or better
    Corequisite: SURG-1050
    Corequisite: SURG-1060

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to comply with all departmental rules and regulations.

    Objectives:

    1. Comply with pertinent regulatory requirements, including OSHA guidelines.
    2. Discuss the importance of standardization.
    3. List the essential components of OSHA Blood-borne pathogen standards and their implications for the central service work environment.
    4. Discuss the guidelines for patient safety.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify key components of asepsis and perform duties with the highest quality of standards.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proper handwashing techniques.
    2. Demonstrate the importance of following established decontamination procedures.
    3. Understand the types and uses of disinfectants and detergents and their application in the CSD.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to exhibit ethical behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate awareness that all surgical patients have the right to the highest standards and practices in asepsis.
    2. Perform all duties with a strict surgical conscience.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to maintain confidentiality.

    Objectives:

    1. Perform duties maintaining confidentiality to protect the privacy of the patient; follow HIPPA guidelines and standards.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to consider safety hazards to self, co-workers, and patients when performing duties.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the electrical inspection of patient care equipment performed in the CSD.
    2. Demonstrate the method of transport of soiled items to CSD to prevent cross-contamination.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to maintain a strict conscience and understanding that the assigned tasks performed properly greatly impact direct patient care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate awareness that all surgical patients have the right to the highest standards and practices in asepsis.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to possess the employability skills for an entry-level central supply technician.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate manual cleaning and disinfection.
    2. Demonstrate the methods of inspection and cleaning different types of patient care items.
    3. Demonstrate how to check various types of instruments for malfunction.
    4. Demonstrate how to check instruments for sharpness.
    5. Demonstrate inspection steps for powered and endoscopic instruments.
    6. Perform tray assembly for surgical instrumentation.
    7. Perform basic preparation and packaging and wrapping techniques of items for sterilization.
    8. Follow proper packaging requirements for the various sterilization methods (steam EtO, Sterrad, low temperature gas plasma).
    9. Properly load, document, monitor and operate sterilizers.
    10. Perform biologic testing on sterilizers.
    11. Demonstrate the acceptable methods of handling sterilized items. Include rotation, inspection, transport, and checking for outdates.
    12. Describe types of distribution and inventory control systems.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be successful in passing the International Association of Healthcare Central Service Material Management (IAHCSMM) national certification examination to earn the title Certified Registered Central Service Technician. (CRCST).

    Objectives:

    1. All course objectives.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Clinical course whose content (based on outcomes & objectives) varies with each individual site.
    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1200 - Surgical Clinical 1


    Credit Hours: 8.00
    (24 contact hrs per week for 16 wks.)
    In this supervised lab and clinical course, students will learn, practice, and perform essential skills required in the surgical setting. Students will demonstrate preoperative operating room preparation, scrubbing, gowning, gloving, set up of the sterile field, and perform the functions of the surgical technologist in the sterile field using aseptic technique in the laboratory setting. Students perform in the role of the scrub and circulator on various surgical procedures. Upon successful completion of pre-clinical competencies, students are assigned in the hospital setting three days a week to gain clinical experience and acquire course competencies. Students are responsible for their own health insurance and transportation. Center Campus.

    Corequisites:
    SURG-1051
    SURG-1250
    SURG-1260
    Prerequisites:
    Admission into the Surgical Technology program, and ENGL-1180 or ENGL-1210; BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730; BIOL-2710; HHSC-1700; SURG-1050; SURG-1060; SURG-1070; and current proof of American Heart Association (AHA)/BLS certification

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to participate as a member of the surgical team.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop essential skills required of a surgical technologist.
    2. Perform the duties and responsibilities of the student scrub surgical technologist.
    3. Demonstrate awareness of professional obligations to the patient and surgical team members.
    4. Perform the duties of the assistant circulator.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to practice safe patient care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate awareness of a surgical conscience.
    2. Demonstrate awareness of OR policies, procedures, standards and guidelines.
    3. Demonstrate the awareness of safety measures.
    4. Perform surgical TIME OUT.
    5. Perform surgical counts.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to practice safety techniques in protecting self and other team members.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate when to seek help.
    2. Demonstrate responsibility for personal actions.
    3. Demonstrate proper techniques in handling sharps.
    4. Understand accountability for ones actions and to others.
    5. Demonstrate proper ways to pass various specialty instruments to the surgeon.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to maintain aseptic technique.

    Objectives:

    1. Place supplies in OR, open sterile supplies.
    2. Demonstrate hand wash, scrub, gowning and gloving.
    3. Perform set up of the sterile field and maintain aseptic technique.
    4. Monitor the sterile field.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to select appropriate recognize instrumentation, supplies, equipment and perform setups of assigned for the following surgical procedures:

    Objectives:

    1. Assemble or check case cart, gather items for the procedure.
    2. Place supplies in OR, open sterile supplies.
    3. Identify various supplies and equipment and state how they are used during the surgical procedure.
    4. Discuss testing, placement and types and preparation of special equipment.
    5. Perform set up of the sterile field and maintain aseptic technique.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to display skill in anticipating the surgeon’s needs before, during, and after surgery.

    Objectives:

    1. Check surgeon’s preference card.
    2. Anticipate needs of the surgeon.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a surgeon’s preference card.

    Objectives:

    1. Maintain log cards of surgical procedures performed.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course students will be able to conform to OR standards, policies, procedures and guidelines.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate awareness of OR records, documentation and other forms.
    2. Understand and state the purpose of good documentation.

    Outcome 9:
    Upon completion of this course students will be able to describe the principles of tissue exposure and wound management.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify criteria used to select items to provide tissue exposure.
    2. Identify and describe use of sutures and needles for procedures.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Complete course contents distributed in instructor’s first day handouts.
    Clinical content (based on outcomes & objectives) varies with each individual site.
    Specification of Clinical Case Requirements included in instructor’s first day lesson plan handout.
    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1250 - Surgical Specialties 1


    Credit Hours: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course is designed to focus on the perioperative care of surgical patients during endoscopic, general, robotic, obstetric and gynecologic, genitourinary, ophthalmic, otorhinolaryngology, oral, maxillofacial, plastic, and reconstructive procedures. Students will become familiar with the diagnostic exams, pathophysiology, procedural considerations, operative procedures and the instrumentation, supplies, and equipment for these specialties. Center Campus.

    Corequisites:
    SURG-1051
    SURG-1200
    SURG-1260
    Prerequisites:
    Admission into the Surgical Technology program, and ENGL-1180 or ENGL-1210; BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730; BIOL-2710; HHSC-1700; SURG-1050; SURG-1060; and SURG-1070; and proof of current American Heart Association (AHA)/BLS certification

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify structures and functions of the regional anatomy for each surgical specialty presented in class.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss anatomy and physiology of the abdominal wall, digestive system, hepatic and biliary system, pancreas spleen, thyroid and breast.
    2. Discuss anatomy and physiology of the female reproductive system.
    3. Identify anatomy and physiology of the genitourinary and male reproductive system.
    4. Identify anatomy and physiology of the integumentary system.
    5. Describe the anatomy and physiology of the eye.
    6. Discuss anatomy and physiology of the face and oral cavity.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe pathophysiology, diseases and disorders related to each system or organ that prompts surgical intervention.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss pre-operative diagnostic procedures or tests used to determine diagnosis for general surgery and endoscopic procedures.
    2. Discuss special preoperative diagnostic procedures or tests relevant to obstetrics and gynecologic surgery.
    3. Discuss special preoperative diagnostic procedures or tests specific to genitourinary surgery.
    4. Discuss special preoperative diagnostic procedures or tests relevant to ophthalmic surgery.
    5. Identify special preoperative diagnostic procedures or tests used for otorhinolaryngologic procedures.
    6. Identify special preoperative diagnostic procedures or tests used for plastic or reconstructive surgical procedures.
    7. Discuss special preoperative diagnostic procedures or tests relevant to oral and maxillofacial surgery.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the highlights and schemes of common surgical procedures.

    Objectives: Describe the scheme, set-up and sequence of endoscopic, robotic and general surgery procedures.

    1. Describe the scheme, set-up and sequence of obstetric and gynecological procedures.
    2. Identify the scheme, set-up and sequence of genitourinary procedures.
    3. Discuss the scheme, set-up and sequence of ophthalmic surgical procedures. Describe the scheme, set-up and sequence of otorhinolaryngologic surgical procedures.
    4. Identify the scheme, set-up and sequence of oral and maxillofacial surgical procedures.
    5. Identify the scheme, set-up and sequence of plastic and reconstructive procedures.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the perioperative (preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative) care, prognosis outcomes and possible complications of the patient for these specialty surgical interventions.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss immediate postoperative care and possible complications for endoscopic, robotic and general surgery procedures.
    2. Discuss the purpose and expected outcomes of endoscopic, robotic and general surgery procedures.
    3. Discuss the intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing endoscopic, robotic and general surgery procedures.
    4. Discuss immediate postoperative care and possible complications of obstetric and gynecological procedures.
    5. Discuss the purpose and expected outcomes of obstetric and gynecological surgery procedures.
    6. Discuss the intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing an obstetric and gynecological procedures.
    7. Discuss immediate postoperative care and possible complications for ophthalmic procedures.
    8. Discuss the purpose and expected outcomes of ophthalmic procedures.
    9. Discuss the intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing ophthalmic procedures.
    10. Discuss immediate postoperative care and possible complications of oral and maxillofacial procedures.
    11. Discuss the purpose and expected outcomes of oral and maxillofacial procedures.
    12. Discuss the intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing oral and maxillofacial procedures.
    13. Discuss immediate postoperative care and possible complications of plastic and reconstructive procedures.
    14. Discuss the purpose and expected outcomes of plastic and reconstructive surgical procedures.
    15. Discuss the intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing oral and maxillofacial procedures.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to determine appropriate selection, preparation and care of specialty surgical instruments, supplies, and equipment required for surgical procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the names and uses of general surgery instruments, supplies, and equipment.
    2. Identify the names and uses of obstetric and gynecological instruments, supplies and equipment. Identify the names and uses of genitourinary instruments, supplies and equipment.
    3. Identify the names and uses of ophthalmic instruments, supplies equipment.
    4. Identify the names and uses of otorhinolaryngology instruments, supplies, and equipment.
    5. Identify the names and uses of oral and maxillofacial instruments, supplies, and equipment.
    6. Identify the names and uses of plastic and reconstructive surgery instruments, supplies, equipment and medications.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    UNIT I
    Incisions
    Endoscopic Surgery
    Robotic Surgery
    General Surgery

    UNIT II Obstetrics and Gynecologic Surgery

    UNIT III Genitourinary Surgery

    UNIT IV Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery

    UNIT V Ophthalmic Surgery

    UNIT VI Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery

    UNIT VII Otorhinolaryngolic (ENT) Surgery


    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1260 - Surgical Pharmacology


    Credit Hours: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course introduces students to medications used in the operating room. An emphasis is placed on classification, administration, forms, methods, interactions, and desired effects of perioperative medications. This course also describes the surgical technologist’s’ legal responsibilities. Center Campus.

    Corequisites:
    SURG-1051
    SURG-1200
    SURG-1250
    Prerequisites:
    Admission into the Surgical Technology program, and ENGL-1180 or ENGL-1210; BIOL-2400 or BIOL-2730; BIOL-2710; HHSC-1700; SURG-1050; SURG-1060; and SURG-1070; and proof of current American Heart Association (AHA)/BLS certification

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate his or her knowledge of basic mathematics and calculations used in the operating room.

    Objectives:

    1. Define terminology, abbreviations, and symbols used in basic mathematics and measurement systems.
    2. Use fractions in conversions and calculations
    3. Convert between fractions and decimals

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize the abbreviations used for units of measure in basic pharmacology.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the abbreviations for the various drugs.
    2. Recognize the abbreviations for units of measure in basic pharmacology.
    3. Read and write roman numerals accurately.
    4. Explain the meaning of percentages.
    5. Explain ratios and proportions.
    6. Recognize different measurement systems and explain their uses.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify various accomplishments in pharmacological history.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the history of pharmacology and advances made by key historical figures.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the different agency roles in drug regulation.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss federal and state roles in regulating drugs.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the role of the surgical technologist in drug administration, including legal responsibilities associated with administration.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the role of the surgical technologist in medication administration.
    2. Explain the five “rights” of medication administration.
    3. Describe the steps of medication administration.
    4. Discuss aseptic techniques for delivery of medications to the sterile field.
    5. List methods for labeling drugs on the sterile back table.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to become familiar with the various forms of medications and how they are administered in the operating room.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the drug administration routes used in surgery.
    2. Identify supplies used in medication administration in surgery.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify various classifications of perioperative medications.

    Objectives:

    1. List drug classification categories and identify subcategories in each.
    2. List classifications of preoperative medications.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand types of intraoperative anesthesia care.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe major types of anesthesia and list applications for each type.
    2. Recognize common agents used in local and regional anesthesia.
    3. Compare and contrast local anesthesia and monitored anesthesia care.
    4. Describe regional blocks and give examples of each.
    5. List the four basic components of a general anesthetic.
    6. List agents used for induction of general anesthesia.
    7. Compare and contrast depolarizing and nondepolarizing muscle relaxants.

    Outcome 9:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify indications for blood and fluid replacement in surgery.

    Objectives:

    1. State indications for blood replacement in the surgical patient.
    2. Describe the process of intraoperative autotransfusion.
    3. List blood substitutes in surgery.
    4. List common IV fluids and their purposes in surgery.
    5. List fluid electrolytes crucial to hemostasis and identify their function.
    6. State objectives of parenteral fluid therapy in surgery.

    Outcome 10:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize symptoms of toxicity and overdose of perioperative medications.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify complications associated with medications.
    2. Describe symptoms of toxicity caused by medication.
    3. Define side effects and distinguish between adverse effects and idiosyncratic effects.

    Outcome 11:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify potential complications associated with anesthesia.

    Objectives:

    1. Define terminology related to anesthesia complications.
    2. List potential complications associated with anesthesia.
    3. Discuss the role of the surgical technologist during a malignant hyperthermia crisis.

    Outcome 12:
    Describe postoperative care (PACU) of the surgical patient.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the types of monitoring the patient receives in the PACU postoperatively.
    2. Describe the monitoring equipment in PACU.
    3. Discuss elements of discharge planning of the patient.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Complete course contents distributed in instructor’s first day handouts.
    UNIT I Basic Pharmacology

    UNIT II Medication Development Regulation and Resources

    UNIT III Pharmacology Math

    UNIT IV Mediation Administration

    UNIT V Antibiotics

    UNIT VI Diagnostic Agents

    UNIT VII Diuretics

    UNIT VIII Hormones

    UNIT IX Medications That Affect Coagulation

    UNIT X Ophthalmic Agents

    UNIT XI Fluids and Irrigation Solutions

    UNIT XII Antineoplastic and Chemotherapy Agents

    UNIT XIII Preoperative Medications

    UNIT XIV Patient Monitoring and Local and Regional Anesthesia

    UNIT XV General Anesthesia

    UNIT XVI Emergency Situation


    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • SURG 1300 - Surgical Clinical 2


    Credit Hours: 8.00
    (24 contact hrs per week for 16 wks)
    This course further develops clinical skills of students in the perioperative environment. Students continue to increase intraoperative skills anticipating the surgeon’s needs during surgery. Students perfect their role as first scrub person, second scrub, and assistant to the circulating person on various surgical procedures as students prepare for employment. This clinical meets three eight-hour days per week. Students are responsible for their own transportation. Center Campus.

    Prerequisites:
    Prerequisite: Admission into the Surgical Technology program and SURG-1051 Prerequisite: Admission into the Surgical Technology program and SURG-1200 Prerequisite: Admission into the Surgical Technology program and SURG- 1250 Prerequisite: Admission into the Surgical Technology program and SURG-1260
    Corequisite: SURG-1350
    Corequisite: SURG-1360

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to participate as a member of the surgical team.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop essential skills required of a surgical technologist.
    2. Perform the duties and responsibilities of the student scrub surgical technologist.
    3. Demonstrate awareness of professional obligations to the patient and surgical team members.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to practice safe patient care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate awareness of a surgical conscience.
    2. Demonstrate awareness of OR policies, procedures, standards and guidelines.
    3. Demonstrate the awareness of safety measures.
    4. Perform surgical TIME OUT.
    5. Perform surgical counts.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to practice safety techniques in protecting self and other team members.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate when to seek help.
    2. Demonstrate responsibility for personal actions.
    3. Demonstrate proper techniques in handling sharps.
    4. Understand accountability for ones actions and to others.
    5. Demonstrate proper ways to pass various specialty instruments to the surgeon.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to maintain aseptic technique.

    Objectives:

    1. Place supplies in OR, open sterile supplies.
    2. Scrub, gown and glove.
    3. Perform set up of the sterile field and maintain aseptic technique.
    4. Monitor the sterile field.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to select appropriate instrumentation, supplies, equipment, and perform setups of assigned surgical procedures.

    Objectives:

    1. Assemble or check case cart, gather items for the procedure.
    2. Place supplies in OR, open sterile supplies.
    3. Identify various supplies and equipment and state how they are used during the surgical procedure.
    4. Discuss testing, placement and types and preparation of special equipment.
    5. Perform set up of the sterile field and maintain aseptic technique.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to display skill in anticipating the surgeon’s needs before, during, and after surgery.

    Objectives:

    1. Check surgeons preference card.
    2. Anticipate needs of the surgeon.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course students will be able to create a surgeons preference card.

    Objectives:

    1. Maintain log cards of surgical procedures performed.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course students will be able to conform to OR standards, policies, procedures and guidelines.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate awareness of OR records, documentation and other forms.
    2. Understand and state the purpose of good documentation.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the principles of tissue exposure and wound management.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify criteria used to select items to provide tissue exposure.
    2. Identify and describe use of sutures and needles for procedures.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Complete course contents distributed in instructor’s first day handouts.
    Clinical course whose content (based on outcomes & objectives) varies with each individual site.
    Specification of Clinical Case Requirements included in instructor’s first day lesson plan handout.
    Primary Faculty
    Ness, Elizabeth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pieczynski, Bernadette



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

 

Page: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10